Modular devices Minia
description
Transcript of Modular devices Minia
Minia
Min
ia
Modular devices
Mod
ular
dev
ices
Any changes reserved
N1-2011-A
www.oez.com
www.oez.com
OEZ s.r.o.Šedivská 339561 51 LetohradCzech Republictel.: +420 465 672 111 +420 465 672 101fax: +420 465 672 398 +420 465 672 151e-mail: [email protected]
MiniaModular devices
INDEX ...................................................................................................................................................A
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS...................................................................................................................B
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS.....................................................................................................C
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS.........................................................................................................................D
OTHER DEVICES..................................................................................................................................................E
GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................................................................F
CONTENTS
We recommend to use Modular devices in plastic and steel-plastic switchboards DistriTon, see catalogue Distribution boards and switchboard cabinets Distri.
Minia
A3
Modular devices
INDEX
A
APN.............................................E29AS................................................E57AST..............................................E29AVN.............................................E32
C
CS-FH000.................................... E59
CS-L.............................................E59
CS-N............................................E59
CS-PE.......................................... E59
E
EKC..............................................E53
ES-35-GS.....................................E53
G
G1L..............................................E52
G2L..............................................E52
G3L..............................................E52
G4L..............................................E52
L
LPE..............................................B2
LPN............................................. B7
LST...............................................B15
M
MAP.............................................E27
MAR............................................ E27
MCR.............................................E13
MIR............................................. E20
MKA............................................ E45
MQA............................................ E24
MQB............................................ E24
MQC............................................ E24
MSK.............................................E38
MSP............................................. E32
MST............................................. E40
MT2.............................................E42
MTR.............................................E17
MTX.............................................E42
N
N3x10-FH000..............................E57
O
OD-LP-MP01............................... B30
OD-LP-VP01................................ B29
OD-LP-VU01................................B28
OD-MIR....................................... E20
OFE..............................................C14
OFI...............................................C17
OLE..............................................C2
OLI...............................................C6
P
PS-LP........................................... B19
PS-LS...........................................B19
PS-LV...........................................C12
PS-OF...........................................C22
PS-OF125.................................... C22
PS-RSI......................................... E6
R
RLP.............................................. E11
RPR............................................. E2
RSI...............................................E4, E5
S
S1L..............................................E52
S2L..............................................E52
S3L..............................................E52
S4L..............................................E52
SC................................................E35, E43, E45
SD................................................E35, E43, E45
SE................................................E35, E43, E45
SG................................................E35, E43, E45
SJB.............................................. D3, D4
SJBC............................................ D8
SP-LP........................................... B25
SP-LS...........................................B25
SVBC............................................D9
SVC..............................................D12
SVD..............................................D16
SVF...............................................D19
SV-LP........................................... B22
SV-LS...........................................B22
SVM.............................................D13
T
TB................................................E37, E40
TC................................................E37, E40
TE................................................E37, E40
TG................................................E37, E40
U
UMB............................................ E47
UMZ............................................ E47
UNZ.............................................E48
UNZR...........................................E48
UTZ..............................................E48
Z
ZSE.............................................. E51
ZSF...............................................E51
Minia
A4
Modular devices
NOTES
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Minia
B
��Miniature circuit breakers LPE up to 63 A (6 kA)......................................................... B2
��Miniature circuit breakers LPN up to 63 A (10 kA)...................................................... B7
��Miniature circuit breakers LST up to 125 A (10 kA).................................................. B15
��Auxiliary and relative switches.......................................................................................... B19
��Shunt trips..................................................................................................................................... B22
��Undervoltage releases............................................................................................................. B25
��Locking insert.............................................................................................................................. B28
��Sealing insert............................................................................................................................... B29
��Insulating barriers..................................................................................................................... B30
Minia
B2
LPE Miniature circuit breakers
Miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole
In
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
2 LPE-2B-1 34528 LPE-2C-1 34549 1 0.135 124 LPE-4B-1 34529 LPE-4C-1 34550 1 0.135 126 LPE-6B-1 34530 LPE-6C-1 34551 1 0.135 12
10 LPE-10B-1 34532 LPE-10C-1 34553 1 0.135 1213 LPE-13B-1 34533 LPE-13C-1 34554 1 0.135 1216 LPE-16B-1 34534 LPE-16C-1 34555 1 0.135 1220 LPE-20B-1 34535 LPE-20C-1 34556 1 0.135 1225 LPE-25B-1 34536 LPE-25C-1 34557 1 0.135 1232 LPE-32B-1 34537 LPE-32C-1 34558 1 0.135 1240 LPE-40B-1 34538 LPE-40C-1 34559 1 0.135 1250 LPE-50B-1 34539 LPE-50C-1 34560 1 0.135 1263 LPE-63B-1 34540 LPE-63C-1 34561 1 0.135 12
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) ��Series of circuit breakers for building, housing and similar
installations up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c. and 60/220 V d.c.
��For protection of cables and conductors against overload
and short-circuit.
��Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 60898.
��Current-limiting circuit breakers.
��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary and relative
switches, undervoltage releases and shunt trips,
interconnecting busbars etc.
��Possibility of locking and sealing in off or on position.
��Possibility of interconnection with residual current
circuit breakers OLE (OLI) and OFE (OFI) by means
of interconnecting busbars.
Miniature circuit breakers, 3-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
2 LPE-2B-3 34870 LPE-2C-3 34891 3 0.39 44 LPE-4B-3 34871 LPE-4C-3 34892 3 0.39 46 LPE-6B-3 34872 LPE-6C-3 34893 3 0.39 4
10 LPE-10B-3 34874 LPE-10C-3 34895 3 0.39 413 LPE-13B-3 34875 LPE-13C-3 34896 3 0.39 416 LPE-16B-3 34876 LPE-16C-3 34897 3 0.39 420 LPE-20B-3 34877 LPE-20C-3 34898 3 0.39 425 LPE-25B-3 34878 LPE-25C-3 34899 3 0.39 432 LPE-32B-3 34879 LPE-32C-3 34900 3 0.39 440 LPE-40B-3 34880 LPE-40C-3 34901 3 0.39 450 LPE-50B-3 34881 LPE-50C-3 34902 3 0.39 463 LPE-63B-3 34882 LPE-63C-3 34903 3 0.39 4
AccessoriesAuxiliary and relative switches PS-LP-.. page B19
Shunt trips SV-LP-.. page B22
Undervoltage releases SP-LP-.. page B25
Locking insert OD-LP-VU01 page B28
Sealing insert OD-LP-VP01 page B29
Insulating barriers OD-LP-MP01 page B30
Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. page E52
Terminal extensions AS-.. page E57
Miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole
In
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
2 LPE-2B-2 34655 LPE-2C-2 34676 2 0.26 64 LPE-4B-2 34656 LPE-4C-2 34677 2 0.26 66 LPE-6B-2 34657 LPE-6C-2 34678 2 0.26 6
10 LPE-10B-2 34659 LPE-10C-2 34680 2 0.26 613 LPE-13B-2 34660 LPE-13C-2 34681 2 0.26 616 LPE-16B-2 34661 LPE-16C-2 34682 2 0.26 620 LPE-20B-2 34662 LPE-20C-2 34683 2 0.26 625 LPE-25B-2 34663 LPE-25C-2 34684 2 0.26 632 LPE-32B-2 34664 LPE-32C-2 34685 2 0.26 640 LPE-40B-2 34665 LPE-40C-2 34686 2 0.26 650 LPE-50B-2 34666 LPE-50C-2 34687 2 0.26 663 LPE-63B-2 34667 LPE-63C-2 34688 2 0.26 6
Minia
B3
LPE Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) Description
EASY CONNECTION ��Upper and lower combined terminal with a secured screw
makes it possible to connect interconnecting busbars with forks and conductors up to 25 mm2 by one screw.
��Plastic cover fi lls in the space under the terminal and thus prevents wrong insertion of conductor to the terminal.
�� Top and bottom connection of circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.
��Bottom connection of circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.
��Interconnecting busbars and terminal extensions see on page E52 - E57.
NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR ��Unambiguously defi ne the state of the circuit breaker.
In [A] Colour
2 �� pink 4 �� brown 6 �� green10 �� red13 �� sandy16 �� grey20 �� blue25 �� yellow32 �� violet40 � black50 �� white63 �� copper
��Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser – it is
indelible.
NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT��Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated
current of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond with
the colours of the threaded fuse-links.
WITHDRAWAL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER FROM THE LINE
OF DEVICES��Without interruption of adjacent current circuits.
��Provided by special top and bottom pawl.
��Withdrawal at top connection (circuit breakers, tumbler
power switches) and at bottom connection (circuit breakers
and residual current circuit breakers).
Lever down Lever up
SWITCHED OFF SWITCHED ON
Secured screw
For interconnecting busbars with forks
For conductors up to 25 mm2
Plastic coverFor interconnecting busbars wiht pins
Top connection Bottom connection
Minia
B4
LPE Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA)
Type LPE
Standards EN 60898-1
Approval marks
Number of poles 1, 2, 3
Tripping characteristics B, C
Rated current In 2 ÷ 63 A
Rated operating voltage Ue 230/400 V a.c. / 60/220 V d.c. 1)
Max. operating voltage Umax
253/440 V a.c. / 66/242 V d.c. 1)
Min. operating voltage Umin
12 V a.c. / d.c.
Rated frequency fn 40 ÷ 60 Hz
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898) Icn
6 kA
Endurance mechanical 20 000 operating cycles
electrical 4 000 operating cycles
Energy limitation class 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp
6 kV
Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) IV
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Connection conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷10) mm2
conductor Cu - flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2
interconnecting busbar IEC - thickness 2 mm
torque 2 Nm
top or bottom connection yes
Operating conditions ambient temperature -30 ÷ +55 °C
working position arbitrary
seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2)
Specifi cations
1) Single-pole connection / two-pole connection2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín
Internal impedance Z, powers losses P, impedance Zs
In
Z 1) P 1) Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2)
[A] [mΩ/pole] [W/pole] characteristic B characteristic C
2 375.00 1.50 23.1 12.84 98.00 1.55 11.6 6.46 26.00 0.95 7.7 4.3
10 12.60 1.25 4.6 2.613 10.80 1.85 3.6 2.016 7.56 1.95 2.9 1.620 5.70 2.30 2.3 1.325 4.24 2.65 1.8 1.032 2.72 2.80 1.4 0.840 2.18 3.50 1.2 0.650 1.56 3.90 0.9 0.563 1.37 5.40 0.7 0.41) Average values per pole protected2) For TN network. U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker
Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LPEI
nCorrection of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to + 60 °C [A] 1) Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2)
[A] -30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 2 1.9 1.8 1.7 2 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7
4 5.2 5 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.2 4 3.7 3.5 3.4 4 3.8 3.7 3.6 3.5 3.4 3.4 3.4
6 7.8 7.5 7.2 6.9 6.6 6.3 6 5.6 5.3 5 6 5.7 5.5 5.3 5.2 5.1 5.1 5.1
10 13 12.5 12 11.5 11 10.5 10 9.3 8.8 8.4 10 9.5 9.2 8.9 8.7 8.5 8.5 8.5
13 16.9 16.3 15.6 15 14.3 13.7 13 12.1 11.4 10.9 13 12.4 11.9 11.6 11.3 11.1 11.1 11.1
16 20.8 20 19.2 18.4 17.6 16.8 16 14.9 14.1 13.4 16 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.9 13.6 13.6 13.6
20 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 18.6 17.6 16.8 20 19 18.3 17.8 17.3 17.1 17 17
25 32.5 31.3 30 28.8 27.5 26.3 25 23.3 22 21 25 23.8 22.9 22.3 21.7 21.3 21.3 21.3
32 41.6 40 38.4 36.8 35.2 33.6 32 29.8 28.2 26.9 32 30.4 29.3 28.5 27.7 27.3 27.2 27.2
40 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 37.2 35.2 33.6 40 38 36.6 25.6 34.7 34.1 34 34
50 65 62.5 60 57.5 55 52.5 50 46.5 44 42 50 47.5 45.8 44.5 43.4 42.7 42.5 42.5
63 81.9 78.8 75.6 72.5 69.3 66.2 63 58.6 55.4 52.9 63 59.9 57.7 56.1 54.6 53.7 53.6 53.61) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic at reference temperature 30 °C 2) Valid for reference temperature 30 °C
Minia
B5
LPE Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA)
Dimensions
Diagram
17.5 35 52.5
~73
64
72
86~90
35
~4.5 44
~4.5
45
LPE-..-1 LPE-..-2 LPE-..-3
2
1 3
42
1 3
42
1
6
5
LPE-..-1 LPE-..-2 LPE-..-3
Selectivity of LPE miniature circuit breakers characteristics B with back-up fuses [kA] Selectivity of LPE miniature circuit breakers characteristics C with back-up fuses [kA]
LPE PN, PV gG LPE PN, PV gGI
n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 I
n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
2 x 1 6 6 6 6 6 6 2 x 1 6 6 6 6 6 64 x 1 1.5 6 6 6 6 6 4 x 1 1.5 6 6 6 6 66 x 1 1.5 2 6 6 6 6 6 x 1 1.5 2 6 6 6 6
10 x 1 1.5 2 5 6 6 6 10 x x 1.5 2 5 6 6 613 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 6 13 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 616 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 6 16 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 620 x x x 2 2.5 5 6 6 20 x x x x 2.5 5 6 625 x x x x 2.5 5 6 6 25 x x x x 2.5 5 6 632 x x x x x 3.5 6 6 32 x x x x x 3.5 6 640 x x x x x 1 5 6 40 x x x x x x 5 650 x x x x x x 3 6 50 x x x x x x 3 663 x x x x x x 3 6 63 x x x x x x x 6
x - without selectivity x - without selectivity
The time selectivity of particular combination up to the value of short-circuit current
Ik
shown in the table is ensured in case of short-circuit behind the LPE circuit breaker
with back-up fuse-link.
Which means that at short-circuit of particular combination under the Ik
value only
the circuit breaker actuates. In case the short-circuit current value is bigger than Ik´
value then also the back-up fuse-link actuates.
Example:
Circuit breaker LPE-16B-... actuates earlier than back-up fuse-link with rated current
50 A up to short-circuit current 2.5 kA. LPE
PV, PN gG
Ik
1
2
5
10
30
60
120
min
.
10 000
5 000
1 000
500
100
50
10
5
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.002
0.006
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80
B C
B C
x In
1.13
I n
1.45
I n
t[s
]v
At ambient temperature +30°C
Minia
B6
LPE Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA)
Characteristics
��Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause
current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.).
The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In
.
��Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current
surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.).
The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In
.
Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 60898-1
Thermal releaseTripping characteristic type
B, C
Conventional non-tripping current Int
for t ≥ 1 h Int
= 1,13 In
Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h I
t = 1,45 I
n
Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s (for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I3
= 2,55 In 1 s < t < 120 s (for I
n > 32 A)
t - break time of the circuit breaker
Electromagnetic releaseTripping characteristic type
B C
Current I4 pro 0,1 s < t < 45 s (for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I4
= 3 In 0,1 s < t < 90 s (for I
n > 32 A)
0,1 s < t < 15 s (for In
≤ 32 A)I
4 = 5 I
n0,1 s < t < 30 s (for In
> 32 A)
Current I5 for t < 0,1 s I
5 = 5 I
nI
5 = 10 I
n
t - break time of the circuit breaker
It
[As]
22
LPE-..C-1
I [A]p
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
1000
0
2 A
4 A
6 A
10 A13 A
63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A
Characteristics I2t
LPE-..B-1
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
1000
0
2 A
4 A
6 A
10 A13 A
63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A
Minia
B7
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)��For building, commercial and industrial installations
up to 63 A 230/400 V a.c. and 220/440 V d.c.
��For protection of cables and conductors against overload
and short-circuit.
��Tripping characteristics B, C, D according to EN 60898.
��Current-limiting circuit breakers.
��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary and relative
switches, undervoltage releases and shunt trips,
interconnecting busbars etc.
��Breaking capacity Icn
10 kA – to achieve higher Icn
(up to
120 kA) it is recommended to use cylindrical fuse-links
PV in fuse switch-disconnectors.
��Possibility of interconnection with residual current
circuit breakers OLE (OLI) and OFE (OFI) by means
of interconnecting busbars.
��Possibility of locking and sealing in off or on position.
��N-pole of circuit breakers LPN-...-1N and LPN-...-3N
contains neither thermal nor short-circuit release, in
switching on it closes before and in switching off it
opens after the other poles.
��For circuit breakers LPN-DC-... device polarity must be
always observed in connecting.
Miniature circuit breakers, 1-poleI
nCharacteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
[A] Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
0.2 LPN-0,2B-1 34159 LPN-0,2C-1 33880 LPN-0,2D-1 33901 1 0.135 120.4 LPN-0,4B-1 34160 LPN-0,4C-1 33881 LPN-0,4D-1 33902 1 0.135 120.5 - - LPN-0,5C-1 33882 LPN-0,5D-1 33903 1 0.135 120.6 LPN-0,6B-1 34161 LPN-0,6C-1 33883 LPN-0,6D-1 33904 1 0.135 120.8 LPN-0,8B-1 33863 LPN-0,8C-1 33884 LPN-0,8D-1 33905 1 0.135 12
1 LPN-1B-1 33864 LPN-1C-1 33885 LPN-1D-1 33906 1 0.135 121.2 LPN-1,2B-1 33865 LPN-1,2C-1 33886 LPN-1,2D-1 33907 1 0.135 121.6 LPN-1,6B-1 33866 LPN-1,6C-1 33887 LPN-1,6D-1 33908 1 0.135 12
2 LPN-2B-1 33867 LPN-2C-1 33888 LPN-2D-1 33909 1 0.135 124 LPN-4B-1 33868 LPN-4C-1 33889 LPN-4D-1 33910 1 0.135 126 LPN-6B-1 33869 LPN-6C-1 33890 LPN-6D-1 33911 1 0.135 128 LPN-8B-1 33870 LPN-8C-1 33891 LPN-8D-1 33912 1 0.135 12
10 LPN-10B-1 33871 LPN-10C-1 33892 LPN-10D-1 33913 1 0.135 1213 LPN-13B-1 33872 LPN-13C-1 33893 LPN-13D-1 33914 1 0.135 1216 LPN-16B-1 33873 LPN-16C-1 33894 LPN-16D-1 33915 1 0.135 1220 LPN-20B-1 33874 LPN-20C-1 33895 LPN-20D-1 33916 1 0.135 1225 LPN-25B-1 33875 LPN-25C-1 33896 LPN-25D-1 33917 1 0.135 1232 LPN-32B-1 33876 LPN-32C-1 33897 LPN-32D-1 33918 1 0.135 1240 LPN-40B-1 33877 LPN-40C-1 33898 LPN-40D-1 33919 1 0.135 1250 LPN-50B-1 33878 LPN-50C-1 33899 LPN-50D-1 33920 1 0.135 1263 LPN-63B-1 33879 LPN-63C-1 33900 LPN-63D-1 33921 1 0.135 12
Miniature circuit breakers 1+N-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
2 - - LPN-2C-1N 33933 - - 2 0.25 64 - - LPN-4C-1N 33934 - - 2 0.25 66 LPN-6B-1N 33922 LPN-6C-1N 33935 LPN-6D-1N 33946 2 0.25 68 LPN-8B-1N 33923 LPN-8C-1N 33936 LPN-8D-1N 33947 2 0.25 6
10 LPN-10B-1N 33924 LPN-10C-1N 33937 LPN-10D-1N 33948 2 0.25 613 LPN-13B-1N 33925 LPN-13C-1N 33938 LPN-13D-1N 33949 2 0.25 616 LPN-16B-1N 33926 LPN-16C-1N 33939 LPN-16D-1N 33950 2 0.25 620 LPN-20B-1N 33927 LPN-20C-1N 33940 LPN-20D-1N 33951 2 0.25 625 LPN-25B-1N 33928 LPN-25C-1N 33941 LPN-25D-1N 33952 2 0.25 632 LPN-32B-1N 33929 LPN-32C-1N 33942 LPN-32D-1N 33953 2 0.25 640 LPN-40B-1N 33930 LPN-40C-1N 33943 LPN-40D-1N 33954 2 0.25 650 LPN-50B-1N 33931 LPN-50C-1N 33944 LPN-50D-1N 33955 2 0.25 663 LPN-63B-1N 33932 LPN-63C-1N 33945 LPN-63D-1N 33956 2 0.25 6
Minia
B8
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)Miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole
In
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
0.2 - - LPN-0,2C-2 33968 LPN-0,2D-2 33989 2 0.26 60.4 - - LPN-0,4C-2 33969 LPN-0,4D-2 33990 2 0.26 60.5 - - LPN-0,5C-2 33970 LPN-0,5D-2 33991 2 0.26 60.6 - - LPN-0,6C-2 33971 LPN-0,6D-2 33992 2 0.26 60.8 - - LPN-0,8C-2 33972 LPN-0,8D-2 33993 2 0.26 6
1 LPN-1B-2 34162 LPN-1C-2 33973 LPN-1D-2 33994 2 0.26 61.2 - - LPN-1,2C-2 33974 LPN-1,2D-2 33995 2 0.26 61.6 - - LPN-1,6C-2 33975 LPN-1,6D-2 33996 2 0.26 6
2 LPN-2B-2 34163 LPN-2C-2 33976 LPN-2D-2 33997 2 0.26 64 LPN-4B-2 34164 LPN-4C-2 33977 LPN-4D-2 33998 2 0.26 66 LPN-6B-2 33957 LPN-6C-2 33978 LPN-6D-2 33999 2 0.26 68 LPN-8B-2 33958 LPN-8C-2 33979 LPN-8D-2 34000 2 0.26 6
10 LPN-10B-2 33959 LPN-10C-2 33980 LPN-10D-2 34001 2 0.26 613 LPN-13B-2 33960 LPN-13C-2 33981 LPN-13D-2 34002 2 0.26 616 LPN-16B-2 33961 LPN-16C-2 33982 LPN-16D-2 34003 2 0.26 620 LPN-20B-2 33962 LPN-20C-2 33983 LPN-20D-2 34004 2 0.26 625 LPN-25B-2 33963 LPN-25C-2 33984 LPN-25D-2 34005 2 0.26 632 LPN-32B-2 33964 LPN-32C-2 33985 LPN-32D-2 34006 2 0.26 640 LPN-40B-2 33965 LPN-40C-2 33986 LPN-40D-2 34007 2 0.26 650 LPN-50B-2 33966 LPN-50C-2 33987 - - 2 0.26 663 LPN-63B-2 33967 LPN-63C-2 33988 - - 2 0.26 6
Miniature circuit breakers, 3-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
0.2 LPN-0,2B-3 34165 LPN-0,2C-3 34027 LPN-0,2D-3 34048 3 0.39 40.4 - - LPN-0,4C-3 34028 LPN-0,4D-3 34049 3 0.39 40.5 LPN-0,5B-3 34008 LPN-0,5C-3 34029 LPN-0,5D-3 34050 3 0.39 40.6 LPN-0,6B-3 34009 LPN-0,6C-3 34030 LPN-0,6D-3 34051 3 0.39 40.8 LPN-0,8B-3 34010 LPN-0,8C-3 34031 LPN-0,8D-3 34052 3 0.39 4
1 LPN-1B-3 34011 LPN-1C-3 34032 LPN-1D-3 34053 3 0.39 41.2 LPN-1,2B-3 34012 LPN-1,2C-3 34033 LPN-1,2D-3 34054 3 0.39 41.6 LPN-1,6B-3 34013 LPN-1,6C-3 34034 LPN-1,6D-3 34055 3 0.39 4
2 LPN-2B-3 34014 LPN-2C-3 34035 LPN-2D-3 34056 3 0.39 44 LPN-4B-3 34015 LPN-4C-3 34036 LPN-4D-3 34057 3 0.39 46 LPN-6B-3 34016 LPN-6C-3 34037 LPN-6D-3 34058 3 0.39 48 LPN-8B-3 34017 LPN-8C-3 34038 LPN-8D-3 34059 3 0.39 4
10 LPN-10B-3 34018 LPN-10C-3 34039 LPN-10D-3 34060 3 0.39 413 LPN-13B-3 34019 LPN-13C-3 34040 LPN-13D-3 34061 3 0.39 416 LPN-16B-3 34020 LPN-16C-3 34041 LPN-16D-3 34062 3 0.39 420 LPN-20B-3 34021 LPN-20C-3 34042 LPN-20D-3 34063 3 0.39 425 LPN-25B-3 34022 LPN-25C-3 34043 LPN-25D-3 34064 3 0.39 432 LPN-32B-3 34023 LPN-32C-3 34044 LPN-32D-3 34065 3 0.39 440 LPN-40B-3 34024 LPN-40C-3 34045 LPN-40D-3 34066 3 0.39 450 LPN-50B-3 34025 LPN-50C-3 34046 LPN-50D-3 34067 3 0.39 463 LPN-63B-3 34026 LPN-63C-3 34047 LPN-63D-3 34068 3 0.39 4
Miniature circuit breakers, 3+N-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
2 LPN-2B-3N 34069 - - - - 4 0.505 34 LPN-4B-3N 34070 - - - - 4 0.505 36 LPN-6B-3N 34071 LPN-6C-3N 34082 LPN-6D-3N 34093 4 0.505 38 LPN-8B-3N 34072 LPN-8C-3N 34083 LPN-8D-3N 34094 4 0.505 3
10 LPN-10B-3N 34073 LPN-10C-3N 34084 LPN-10D-3N 34095 4 0.505 313 LPN-13B-3N 34074 LPN-13C-3N 34085 LPN-13D-3N 34096 4 0.505 316 LPN-16B-3N 34075 LPN-16C-3N 34086 LPN-16D-3N 34097 4 0.505 320 LPN-20B-3N 34076 LPN-20C-3N 34087 LPN-20D-3N 34098 4 0.505 325 LPN-25B-3N 34077 LPN-25C-3N 34088 LPN-25D-3N 34099 4 0.505 332 LPN-32B-3N 34078 LPN-32C-3N 34089 LPN-32D-3N 34100 4 0.505 340 LPN-40B-3N 34079 LPN-40C-3N 34090 LPN-40D-3N 34101 4 0.505 350 LPN-50B-3N 34080 LPN-50C-3N 34091 - - 4 0.505 363 LPN-63B-3N 34081 LPN-63C-3N 34092 - - 4 0.505 3
Minia
B9
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)DC miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole
In
[A]
Characteristic C Number Weight Package
Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
2 LPN-DC-2C-1 34115 1 0.14 124 LPN-DC-4C-1 34116 1 0.14 126 LPN-DC-6C-1 34117 1 0.14 128 LPN-DC-8C-1 34118 1 0.14 12
10 LPN-DC-10C-1 34119 1 0.14 1213 LPN-DC-13C-1 34120 1 0.14 1216 LPN-DC-16C-1 34121 1 0.14 1220 LPN-DC-20C-1 34122 1 0.14 1225 LPN-DC-25C-1 34123 1 0.14 1232 LPN-DC-32C-1 34124 1 0.14 1240 LPN-DC-40C-1 34125 1 0.14 1250 LPN-DC-50C-1 34126 1 0.14 1263 LPN-DC-63C-1 34127 1 0.14 12
DC miniature circuit breakers, 2-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic C Number Weight Package
Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
2 LPN-DC-2C-2 34141 2 0.27 64 LPN-DC-4C-2 34142 2 0.27 66 LPN-DC-6C-2 34143 2 0.27 68 LPN-DC-8C-2 34144 2 0.27 6
10 LPN-DC-10C-2 34145 2 0.27 613 LPN-DC-13C-2 34146 2 0.27 616 LPN-DC-16C-2 34147 2 0.27 620 LPN-DC-20C-2 34148 2 0.27 625 LPN-DC-25C-2 34149 2 0.27 632 LPN-DC-32C-2 34150 2 0.27 640 LPN-DC-40C-2 34151 2 0.27 650 LPN-DC-50C-2 34152 2 0.27 663 LPN-DC-63C-2 34153 2 0.27 6
AccessoriesAuxiliary and relative switches PS-LP-.. page B19
Shunt trips SV-LP-.. page B22
Undervoltage releases SP-LP-.. page B25
Locking insert OD-LP-VU01 page B28
Sealing insert OD-LP-VP01 page B29
Insulating barriers OD-LP-MP01 page B30
Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. page E52
Terminal extensions AS-.. page E57
Minia
B10
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)Description
EASY CONNECTION ��Upper and lower combined terminal with a secured
screw makes it possible to connect interconnecting busbars with forks and conductors up to 25 mm2 by one screw.
��Plastic cover fi lls in the space under the terminal and thus prevents wrong insertion of conductor to the terminal.
��Top and bottom connection of circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.
��Bottom connection of circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.
��Interconnecting busbars and terminal extensions see on page E52 - E57.
NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR��Unambiguously defi ne the state of the circuit breaker.
In [A] Colour
0.2 ÷ 1.6 �� black2 �� pink4 �� brown6 �� green8 �� light green10 �� red13 �� sandy16 �� grey20 �� blue25 �� yellow32 �� violet40 � black50 �� white63 �� copper
��Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser – it is
indelible.
Secured screw
For interconnecting busbars with forks
For conductors up to 25 mm2
Plastic cover
For interconnecting busbars wiht pins
NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT��Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated
current of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond
with the colours of the threaded fuse-links.
WITHDRAWAL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER FROM THE LINE
OF DEVICES ��Without interruption of adjacent current circuits.
��Provided by special top and bottom pawl.
��Withdrawal at top connection (circuit breakers, tumbler
power switches) and at bottom connection (circuit breakers
and residual current circuit breakers).
Top connection Bottom connection
Lever down Lever up
SWITCHED OFF SWITCHED ON
Minia
B11
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)
Type LPN LPN-DC
Standards EN 60898-1 EN 60898-2 1)
Approval marks
Number of poles 1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N 1, 2
Tripping characteristics B, C, D C
Rated current In 0.2 ÷ 63 A 2 ÷ 63 A
Rated operating voltage Ue 230/400 V a.c. / 60/220 V d.c. 2) 220/440 V d.c. 2)
Max. operating voltage Umax
253/440 V a.c. / 66/242 V d.c. 2) 242/484 V d.c. 2)
Min. operating voltage Umin
12 V a.c. / d.c. 12 V d.c.
Rated frequency fn 40 ÷ 60 Hz -
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898-1) Icn
10 kA -
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898-2) Icn - 10 kA (τ ≤ 5 ms)
Short-circuit service breaking capacity (EN 60898-2) Ics - 100 % I
cn
Endurance mechanical 20 000 operating cycles 20 000 operating cycles
electrical 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles
Energy limitation class 3 3
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp
6 kV 6 kV
Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) IV IV
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Connection conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷ 10) mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷ 10) mm2
conductor Cu - flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2
interconnecting busbar IEC - thickness 2 mm 2 mm
torque 2 Nm 2 Nm
top or bottom connection yes yes 3)
Operating conditions ambient temperature -30 ÷ +55 °C -30 ÷ +55 °C
working position arbitrary arbitrary
seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 4) IEC 980:1993 4)
Specifi cations
1) DC tests2) Single-pole connection / two-pole connection3) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker in d.c. circuits4) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín
Internal impedance Z, powers losses P, impedance Zs
In
Z 1) P 1) Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2)
[A] [mΩ/pole] [W/pole] characteristic B characteristic C characteristic D
0.2 30650 1.25 230.9 128.3 72.20.4 7670 1.25 115.5 64.2 36.10.5 5440 1.35 92.4 51.3 28.90.6 3400 1.20 77.0 42.8 24.10.8 2130 1.35 57.8 32.1 18.01 1350 1.35 46.2 25.7 14.41.2 763 1.10 38.5 21.4 12.01.6 544 1.40 28.9 16.0 9.02 392 1.55 23.1 12.8 7.24 75.50 1.20 11.6 6.4 3.66 26.00 0.95 7.7 4.3 2.48 17.40 1.10 5.8 3.2 1.8
10 12.60 1.25 4.6 2.6 1.413 10.80 1.85 3.6 2.0 1.116 7.56 1.95 2.9 1.6 0.920 5.70 2.30 2.3 1.3 0.725 4.24 2.65 1.8 1.0 0.632 2.72 2.80 1.4 0.8 0.540 2.18 3.50 1.2 0.6 0.450 1.56 3.90 0.9 0.5 0.363 1.37 5.40 0.7 0.4 0.21) Average values per pole protected2) For TN network, U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker
Minia
B12
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)
Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LPN
In
Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to + 60 °C [A] 1) Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2)
[A] -30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0.2 0.26 0.25 0.24 0.23 0.22 0.21 0.2 0.19 0.18 0.19 0.2 0.19 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.17 0.17 0.170.4 0.52 0.50 0.48 0.46 0.44 0.42 0.4 0.37 0.35 0.34 0.4 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.35 0.34 0.34 0.340.5 0.65 0.63 0.60 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.5 0.47 0.44 0.42 0.5 0.48 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.43 0.430.6 0.78 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.66 0.63 0.6 0.56 0.53 0.50 0.6 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.510.8 1.04 1 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84 0.8 0.74 0.70 0.67 0.8 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.68 0.68
1 1.30 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1 0.93 0.88 0.84 1 0.95 0.92 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.85 0.851.2 1.56 1.50 1.44 1.38 1.32 1.26 1.2 1.12 1.06 1.01 1.2 1.14 1.10 1.07 1.04 1.02 1.02 1.021.6 2.08 2 1.92 1.84 1.76 1.68 1.6 1.49 1.41 1.34 1.6 1.52 1.47 1.42 1.39 1.37 1.36 1.36
2 2.60 2.50 2.40 2.30 2.20 2.10 2 1.90 1.80 1.70 2 1.90 1.80 1.80 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.704 5.20 5 4.80 4.60 4.40 4.20 4 3.70 3.50 3.40 4 3.80 3.70 3.60 3.50 3.40 3.40 3.406 7.80 7.50 7.20 6.90 6.60 6.30 6 5.60 5.30 5 6 5.70 5.50 5.30 5.20 5.10 5.10 5.108 10.40 10 9.60 9.20 8.80 8.40 8 7.40 7 6.70 8 7.60 7.30 7.10 6.90 6.80 6.80 6.80
10 13 12.50 12 11.50 11 10.50 10 9.30 8.80 8.40 10 9.50 9.20 8.90 8.70 8.60 8.50 8.5013 16.90 16.30 15.60 15 14.30 13.70 13 12.10 11.40 10.90 13 12.40 11.90 11.60 11.30 11.20 11.10 11.1016 20.80 20 19.20 18.40 17.60 16.80 16 14.90 14.10 13.40 16 15.20 14.70 14.20 13.90 13.70 13.60 13.6020 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 18.60 17.60 16.80 20 19 18.30 17.80 17.30 17.10 17 1725 32.50 31.30 30 28.80 27.50 26.30 25 23.30 22 21 25 23.80 22.90 22.30 21.70 21.40 21.30 21.3032 41.60 40 38.40 36.80 35.20 33.60 32 29.80 28.20 26.90 32 30.40 29.30 28.50 27.70 27.30 27.20 27.2040 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 37.20 35.20 33.60 40 38 36.60 25.60 34.70 34.10 34 3450 65 62.50 60 57.50 55 52.50 50 46.50 44 42 50 47.50 45.80 44.50 43.40 42.70 42.50 42.5063 81.90 78.80 75.60 72.50 69.30 66.20 63 58.60 55.40 52.90 63 59.90 57.70 56.10 54.60 53.70 53.60 53.60
1) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic at reference temperature 30 °C 2) Valid for reference temperature 30 °C
Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics B with back-up fuses [kA] Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics C with back-up fuses [kA]
LPN PN, PV gG LPN PN, PV gGI
n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 I
n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
≤ 1.2 0.5 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 ≤ 1.2 0.5 6 10 10 10 10 10 101.6 0.5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 1.6 0.5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10
2 x 1 6 10 10 10 10 10 2 x 1 6 10 10 10 10 104 x 1 1.5 6 10 10 10 10 4 x 1 1.5 6 10 10 10 106 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 10 6 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 108 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 10 8 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 10
10 x 1 1.5 2 5 10 10 10 10 x x 1.5 2 5 10 10 1013 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 10 13 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 1016 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 10 16 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 1020 x x x 2 2.5 5 10 10 20 x x x x 2.5 5 10 1025 x x x x 2.5 5 10 10 25 x x x x 2.5 5 10 1032 x x x x x 3.5 6 10 32 x x x x x 3.5 6 1040 x x x x x 1 5 10 40 x x x x x x 5 1050 x x x x x x 3 6 50 x x x x x x 3 663 x x x x x x 3 6 63 x x x x x x x 6
x - without selectivity x - without selectivity
Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics D with back-up fuses [kA]
LPN PN, PV gGI
n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100
≤ 1.2 0.5 6 10 10 10 10 10 101.6 0.5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10
2 x 1 6 10 10 10 10 104 x 1 1.5 6 10 10 10 106 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 108 x x 1.5 2 6 10 10 10
10 x x x 2 5 10 10 1013 x x x x 2.5 6 10 1016 x x x x 2.5 6 10 1020 x x x x x 5 10 1025 x x x x x x 10 1032 x x x x x x 6 1040 x x x x x x x 1050 x x x x x x x x63 x x x x x x x x
x - without selectivity
The time selectivity of particular combination up to the va-
lue of short-circuit current Ik
shown in the table is ensured
in case of short-circuit behind the LPN circuit breaker with
back-up fuse-link.
Which means that at short-circuit of particular combination
under the Ik
value only the circuit breaker actuates. In case
the short-circuit current value is bigger than Ik
, value then
also the back-up fuse-link actuates.
Example:
Circuit breaker LPN-16B-... actuates earlier than back-up fuse-
-link with rated current 50 A up to short-circuit current 2.5 kA.
LPN
PV, PN gG
Ik
Minia
B13
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)
Dimensions
For protection of d.c. circuits it is possible to use LPE, LPN circuit
breakers and LPN-DC circuit breakers depending on voltage.
7017.5 35 52.5
~73
64
72
86~90
35
~4.5 44
~4. 5
45
LPN-..-1LPN-DC-..-1
LPN-..-1NLPN-..-2LPN-DC-..-2
LPN-..-3 LPN-..3N
Diagram
2
N1
N22 42 42
1 3 1 3 1 1
6
5 3
42
1
N26
N15
2
1 3
42
1
LPN-..-1 LPN-DC-..-2LPN-..-1N LPN-..-2 LPN-..-3 LPN-..-3N LPN-DC-..-1
Protection of DC circuits
Top connection Bottom connection Top connection Bottom connection
1-pole connection LPN-DC 2-pole connection LPN-DC
220 V / L+0 V / L-
220 V / L+ 0 V / L-440 V / L+
I
II
I
I
I
I
II
I
I
II
I
0 V / L-
440 V / L+0 V / L-
LPN
-DC
-...-1
LPN
-DC
-...-1
LPN
-DC
-...-2
LPN
-DC
-...-2
LoadSourceLoad Source
Load LoadSourceSource
Protection of DC circuits
Type of miniature Rated voltage Ue
circuit breaker ≤ 60 V d.c. ≤ 220 V d.c. ≤ 440 V d.c.
LPE, LPN-...-1 � - -LPE, LPN-...-2 � � -LPN-DC-...-1 1) � � -LPN-DC-...-2 1) � � �1) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker
� Possible to use
Source SourceLoad
Load Miniature circuit breaker
Load I
I
I
I
I
I
I I
Correct polarity connection of DC circuit breakers, loads etc. in the
circuit has to follow the direction of current fl ow in DC circuit that
is from (+) to (-).
Example of current fl ow according to
polarity is shown by the arrow:
1) Correct connection of devices
= equal direction of current fl ow on the devices
2) Wrong connection of devices
= contradictory current fl ow on the devices
The correct connection of devices (point 1) seems to be illogical due to connection of load terminal (+) and circuit breaker terminal (-). However, it is correct connection!!!
Minia
B14
LPN Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)
Characteristics
��Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause
current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In
.
��Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current
surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In
.
��Characteristic D: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes high
current surges (transformers, 2-pole motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (12 ÷ 16) In
.
Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 60898-1
Thermal releaseTripping characteristic type
B, C, D
Conventional non-tripping current Int
for t ≥ 1 h Int
= 1.13 In
Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h I
t = 1.45 I
n
Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s (for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I3
= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s (for I
n > 32 A)
t - break time of the circuit breaker
Characteristics I2t
Electromagnetic releaseTripping characteristic type
B C D
Current I4 pro 0.1 s < t < 45 s (for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I4
= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s (for I
n > 32 A)
0.1 s < t < 15 s (for In
≤ 32 A)I
4 = 5 I
n0.1 s < t < 30 s (for In
> 32 A)
0.1 s < t < 4 s 1) (for In
≤ 32 A)I
4 = 10 I
n0.1 s < t < 8 s (for In
> 32 A)
Current I5 for t < 0.1 s I
5 = 5 I
nI
5 = 10 I
nI
5 = 20 I
n
1) for In
≤ 10 A is permissible that t < 8 s
t - break time of the circuit breaker
1
2
5
10
30
60
120
min
.
10 000
5 000
1 000
500
100
50
10
5
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.002
0.006
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80
B C D
B C D
x In
1.13
I n
1.45
I n
t [s]
v
At ambient temperature +30°C
LPN-..B-1
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
0.2 - 0.6 A
0.8 A
1- 1.2 A
1.6 - 2 A
4 A
6 A8 A10 A13 A
63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A
LPN-..C-1
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
0.2 - 0.6 A
0.8 A
1- 1.2 A
1.6 - 2 A
4 A
6 A
8 A10 A13 A
63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A
LPN-..D-1
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
0,2 - 0,6 A
0,8 A
1- 1,2 A
1,6 - 2 A
4 A
6 A8 A10 A13 A
63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A
Minia
B15
LST Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA)
��For building, commercial and industrial installations
up to 125 A 230/400 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.
��For protection of cables and conductors against overload
and short-circuit.
��Tripping characteristics B, C, D according to EN 60898-1.
��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches,
undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting
busbars etc.
��Breaking capacity Icn
10 kA – to achieve higher Icn
(up to
120 kA) it is recommended to use cylindrical fuse-links
PV in fuse switch-disconnectors .
��Possibility of sealing in on or off position.
��N-pole of circuit breakers LST-...-3N contains neither
thermal nor short-circuit release, in switching on it
closes before and in switching off it opens after the
other poles.
��For circuit breakers LST-DC-... device polarity must be
always observed in connecting.
��Possibility to connect LST with pin interconnecting
busbars spacing 27 mm.
Miniature circuit breakers, 1-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
40 LST-40B-1 37440 LST-40C-1 37443 LST-40D-1 37446 1.5 0.21 350 LST-50B-1 37441 LST-50C-1 37444 LST-50D-1 37447 1.5 0.21 363 LST-63B-1 37442 LST-63C-1 37445 LST-63D-1 37448 1.5 0.21 380 LST-80B-1 37214 LST-80C-1 37217 LST-80D-1 37220 1.5 0.21 3
100 LST-100B-1 37215 LST-100C-1 37218 LST-100D-1 37221 1.5 0.21 3125 LST-125B-1 37216 LST-125C-1 37219 LST-125D-1 37222 1.5 0.21 3
Miniature circuit breakers, 3-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
40 LST-40B-3 37449 LST-40C-3 37452 LST-40D-3 37455 4.5 0.66 150 LST-50B-3 37450 LST-50C-3 37453 LST-50D-3 37456 4.5 0.66 163 LST-63B-3 37451 LST-63C-3 37454 LST-63D-3 37457 4.5 0.66 180 LST-80B-3 37223 LST-80C-3 37226 LST-80D-3 37229 4.5 0.66 1
100 LST-100B-3 37224 LST-100C-3 37227 LST-100D-3 37230 4.5 0.66 1125 LST-125B-3 37225 LST-125C-3 37228 LST-125D-3 37231 4.5 0.66 1
Miniature circuit breakers, 3+N-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package
Type Product code Type Product
code Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
40 LST-40B-3N 37458 LST-40C-3N 37461 LST-40D-3N 37464 6 0.84 150 LST-50B-3N 37459 LST-50C-3N 37462 LST-50D-3N 37465 6 0.84 163 LST-63B-3N 37460 LST-63C-3N 37463 LST-63D-3N 37466 6 0.84 180 LST-80B-3N 37232 LST-80C-3N 37235 LST-80D-3N 37238 6 0.84 1
100 LST-100B-3N 37233 LST-100C-3N 37236 LST-100D-3N 37239 6 0.84 1125 LST-125B-3N 37234 LST-125C-3N 37237 LST-125D-3N 37240 6 0.84 1
DC miniature circuit breakers, 2-poleI
n
[A]
Characteristic C Number Weight Package
Type Product code
of modules [kg] [pcs]
80 LST-DC-80C-2 37241 3 0.45 2100 LST-DC-100C-2 37242 3 0.45 2125 LST-DC-125C-2 37243 3 0.45 2
AccessoriesAuxiliary switches PS-LS-.. page B19
Shunt trips SV-LS-.. page B22
Undervoltage releases SP-LS-.. page B25
Interconnecting busbars S1L-27-.., S3L-27-.., S4L-27-.. page E52
Terminal extensions AS-50-S-AL01, CS-FH000-.., N3x10-FH000 page E57
Minia
B16
LST Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA)
Description
Type LST LST-DC
Standards EN 60898-1 EN 60898-1
Approval marks
Number of poles 1, 3, 3+N 2
Tripping characteristics B, C, D C
Rated current In 40 ÷ 125 A 80, 100, 125 A
Rated operating voltage Ue 230/400 V a.c. / 48 V d.c. 1) 440 V d.c.
Max. operating voltage Umax
253/440 V a.c. / 52 V d.c. 1) 484 V d.c.
Min. operating voltage Umin
12 V a.c. / d.c. 12 V d.c.
Rated frequency fn 40 ÷ 60 Hz -
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898) Icn
10 kA -
Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (EN 60947-2) Icu
- 10 kA (τ ≤ 5 ms)
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (EN 60947-2) Ics - 100 % I
cu
Endurance mechanical 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles
electrical 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp
6 kV 6 kV
Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) IV IV
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Connection conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded), flexible 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2
torque 3.5 Nm 3.5 Nm
top or bottom connection yes yes 2)
Operating conditions ambient temperature -30 ÷ +55 °C -30 ÷ +55 °C
working position arbitrary arbitrary
seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 3) IEC 980:1993 3)
Specifi cations
��Test push-button for check of the tripping mechanism
function.
In [A] Colour
40 �� black50 �� white63 �� copper80 �� silver
100 �� red125 �� yellow
Internal impedance Z, powers losses P, impedance Zs
In
[A]
Z 1)
[mΩ/pole]
P 1)
[VA/pole]
Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2)
characteristic B characteristic C characteristic D
40 2.31 3.69 1.16 0.64 0.36
50 1.73 4.32 0.93 0.51 0.28
63 1.42 5.63 0.73 0.40 0.23
80 0.91 5.79 0.57 0.32 0.18
100 0.80 8.03 0.46 0.26 0.14
125 0.61 9.46 0.36 0.20 0.111) Average values per pole protected2) For TN network, U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker.
1) Single-pole connection / two-pole connection2) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker in d.c. circuits3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín
NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR��Unambiguously defi ne the state of the circuit breaker.
Lever down Lever up
SWITCHED OFF SWITCHED ON
��Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser - it is indelible.
NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT��Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated cu-
rrent of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond with
the colours of the threaded fuse-links.
Minia
B17
LST Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA)
For protection of d.c. circuits it is possible to use LST circuit breakers
and LST-DC circuit breakers depending on voltage.
Dimensions
Diagram
Protection of DC circuits
26.6 53.2 79.8 106.4
74
70
71.5
9045
60
445.5
1.7
LST-..-1 LST-DC-..-2 LST-..-3 LST-..-3N
2
1
LST-..1
3
42
1
LST-DC-..-2
3
42
1
6
5
LST-..3
3
42
1
N26
N15
LST-..-3N
Top connection Bottom connection
2-pole connection LST-DC
LST-
DC
-...-2
LST-
DC
-...-2
Load Source
Load Source
I I
I
I I
I
I
I
440 V / L+0 V / L-
440 V / L+ 0 V / L-
Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LST
In
[A]
Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to +60 °C [A] 1)
-30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C
40 52.0 50.0 48.0 48.0 46.0 44.0 40 37.2 35.2 33.6
50 65.0 62.5 60.0 60.0 57.5 55.0 50 46.5 44.0 42.0
63 81.9 78.8 75.6 75.6 72.5 69.3 63 58.6 55.4 52.9
80 104.0 104.0 100.0 96.0 92.0 88.0 80 74.4 70.4 67.2
100 130.0 130.0 125.0 120.0 115.0 110.0 100 93.0 88.0 84.0
125 162.5 162.5 156.3 150.0 143.8 137.5 125 116.3 110.0 105.01) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic, reference temperature 30 °C
Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2)
1 2 3 4 5
40 38.00 37.00 36.00 35.20
50 47.50 46.25 45.00 44.00
63 59.85 58.28 56.70 55.44
80 76.00 74.00 72.00 70.40
100 95.00 92.50 90.00 88.00
125 118.75 115.63 112.50 110.002)
Valid for reference temperature 30 °C
Protection of DC circuits
Type of miniature circuit breaker Rated voltage Ue
≤ 48 V d.c. ≤ 440 V d.c.
LST-...-1 � -LST-DC-...-2 1) � �1) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker
� Possible to use
Correct polarity connection of DC circuit breakers, see page B13
Minia
B18
LST Miniature circuit breakers
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA)
Characteristics
��Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause
current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In .
��Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current
surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In
.
��Characteristic D: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes high
current surges (transformers, 2-pole motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (12 ÷ 16) In
.
Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 60898-1
Thermal releaseTripping characteristic type
B, C, D
Conventional non-tripping current Int
for t ≥ 1 h ( for In
≤ 63 A) I
nt = 1.13 I
n Int
for t ≥ 2 h ( for In
> 63 A)
Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h ( for I
n ≤ 63 A)
It = 1.45 I
n It for t < 2 h ( for I
n > 63 A)
Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s ( for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I3
= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s ( for I
n > 32 A)
t - break time of the circuit breaker
Characteristics I2t
It
[As]
22
1 500
15 000
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
LST-..B-..
150 000
100 000
200 000
300 000
400 000500 000
I [A]p
63 A50 A
40 A
125 A
100 A80 A
1
2
5
10
30
60
120
min
.
10 000
5 000
1 000
500
100
50
10
5
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.002
0.006
B C D
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80
x In
1.13
I n
1.45
I n
t [s]
v
B C DB C D
At ambient temperature +30°C
Electromagnetic releaseTripping characteristic type
B C D
Current I4 for 0.1 s < t < 45 s ( for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I4
= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s ( for I
n > 32 A)
0.1 s < t < 15 s ( for In
≤ 32 A)I
4 = 5 I
n0.1 s < t < 30 s ( for In
> 32 A)
0.1 s < t < 4 s 1) ( for In
≤ 32 A)I
4 = 10 I
n0.1 s < t < 8 s ( for In
> 32 A)
Current I5 for t < 0.1s I
5 = 5 I
nI
5 = 10 I
nI
5 = 20 I
n
1) for In
≤ 10 A it is permissible that t < 8 s
t - break time of the circuit breaker
It
[As]
22
1 500
15 000
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
LST-..C-..
150 000
100 000
200 000
300 000
400 000500 000
I [A]p
63 A50 A
40 A
125 A100 A80 A
It
[As]
22
1 500
15 000
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
LST-..D-..
150 000
100 000
200 000
300 000
400 000500 000
I [A]p
63 A50 A40 A
125 A
100 A
80 A
Minia
B19
Miniature circuit breakers
AUXILIARY AND RELATIVE SWITCHES
Auxiliary and relative switches PS-LP
��Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN.
��Auxiliary and relative switches are designed for signalling
the position of the main contacts of circuit breakers LPE,
LPN and tumbler power switches APN in tripping:
� by releases or manually – i.e. in switching off by
overload, short-circuit, shunt trip or undervoltage
release and control lever. It is possible to use
contacts with this function (auxiliary contact)
to set switch SEL to position „A+A“ (resp. „A“ for
switching contact)
� only by releases – i.e. only in tripping by short-
circuit, overload, shunt trip or undervoltage
release. It is possible to use one contact with this
function (relative contact) to set switch SEL to
position „A+R“ (resp. „R“ for switching contact).
��Selection of auxiliary/relative contact function is perfor-
med by the rotary switch SEL on the side of the device.
��2 auxiliary and relative switches can be connected to one
miniature circuit breakers (tumbler power switch).
��They are suitable for application in SELV and PELV
circuits – suffi cient insulation is provided between
the circuit breaker (power tumbler switch) and
auxiliary and relative switches.
Arrangement of contacts 1) - position of switch SEL Type Product Number Weight PackageA+A 2) A+R 2) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
A 11 A 10 + R 10 PS-LP-110S 34260 0.5 0.05 1A 11 A 10 + R 10 PS-LP-110S-Au 3) 34261 0.5 0.05 1A 11 A 01 + R 01 PS-LP-110S-Y 34262 0.5 0.05 1A 20 A 10 + R 01 PS-LP-200S 34263 0.5 0.05 1A 02 A 01 + R 10 PS-LP-020S 34264 0.5 0.05 1A 001 R 001 PS-LP-001S 34265 0.5 0.045 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) Position A+A = contacts function in „auxiliary“ mode; position A+R = one contact is switched to „relative“ mode“ The choice of mode is done by rotary switch SEL on the side of the auxiliary switch3) Gold-plated contacts – suitable for switching of low output loads
Auxiliary switches PS-LS
��Accessories to: LST, AST.
��Can be used also with formerly produced types of circuit
breakers LSE, LSN.
��Auxiliary switches are used for position signalling of main
contacts of circuit breaker LST and tumbler power
switches AST in switching off by releases or manually
– i.e. in switching off by overload, short-circuit, shunt
trip or undervoltage release and control lever.
��They are suitable for application in SELV and PELV
circuits – suffi cient insulation is provided between
the circuit breaker (power tumbler switch) and
auxiliary and relative switches.
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
11 PS-LS-1100 35664 0.5 0.043 111 PS-LS-1100-Au 2) 35665 0.5 0.043 121 PS-LS-2100 35666 0.5 0.049 121 PS-LS-2100-Au 2) 35667 0.5 0.049 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Gold-plated contacts – suitable for switching of low output loads
Minia
B20
Miniature circuit breakers
A+A A+R
SEL
PS-LP-110SPS-LP-110S-Au
PS-LP-020SPS-LP-110S-Y PS-LP-200S PS-LP-001S
14 22
13 21
SEL A+A� SEL A+A� SEL A+A� SEL A+A� SEL A�
11
12
23
24
2313
14 24
11 21
12 22
11
12 14
Change-over switch SEL in position A+A
AUXILIARY AND RELATIVE SWITCHES
Type PS-LP-.. PS-LS-..
Standards EN 60947-5-1, EN 62019 EN 60947-5-1
Approval marks
Arrangement of contacts 1) 2) A11/A10+R10, A11/A01+R01, A20/A10+R01,
A02/A01+R10, A001/R001
11, 21
Rated operating voltage / current Ue / I
eAC-12 230 V a.c. / 6 A 230 V a.c. / 6 A
AC-13 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 -
AC-15 230 V a.c. / 3 A 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A
DC-13 220 V d.c. / 0.55 A 220 V d.c. / 1 A
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp
4 kV 4 kV
Mechanical endurance 20 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles
Mounting on the right side of the device on the right side of the device
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2
Conductor flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -30 ÷ 55 °C -30 ÷ 55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary
Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 3) IEC 980:1993 3)
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) A=auxiliary contact, R=relative contact3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín
Specifi cations
Dimensions
Diagram
8.75 5.5
70
44
60
93 90 45
PS-LS-..PS-LP-110SPS-LP-110S-..PS-LP-200SPS-LP-020S
PS-LP-001S
33
23
11
12
24
348.75
12.75
86
44
72
45
8.75
12.75
12 14
1311
2321 9391
942422 92 9214
9111
9412
64.2
Minia
B21
Miniature circuit breakers
AUXILIARY AND RELATIVE SWITCHES
Diagram
Installation of auxiliary switch on miniature circuit breaker (tumbler
switch)
A+AA+R
SEL
SEL A+� R SEL A+� R SEL A+� R SEL A+� R SEL � R
13
14
93
94
11
12
91
92
9113
14 92
11 93
12 94 92
91
94
PS-LP-110SPS-LP-110S-Au
PS-LP-020SPS-LP-110S-Y PS-LP-200S PS-LP-001SChange-over switch SEL in position A+R
PS-LP-..
1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the
device are in OFF position.
2. Insert the lower fastening catch in the device recess.
3. Press the auxiliary switch to the device so that the upper
fastening latch of the auxiliary switch snaps in the
device recess.
4. Check correct function by switching.
PS-LS-..
1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the device
are in ON position.
2. From the right slide the longer shaft in the control lever
of the device and shorter one in the hole of the switching
system of the device
3. From the right slide the auxiliary switch on the device so
that one shaft interconnects control levers and the other the
switching systems.
4. Press the auxiliary switch to the device and snap the side
fastening clamps of the auxiliary switch in the device recess.
5. Check correct function by switching.
OFF
LPNLPEAPN PS-LP
max 2x
OFF
1 1
2
3
2
PS-LS
LST, AST
ON
13.5
9.8
ON
34 12
33 11
PS-LS-1100
34 24 12
33 23 11
PS-LS-2100
Minia
B22
Miniature circuit breakers
SHUNT TRIPS
Shunt trips SV-LP
��Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN.
��For tripping the circuit breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler
power switch APN by applied voltage.
��It contains auxiliary make contact, which can be used
for position signalling of the main contacts of circuit
breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler power switch APN.
Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight PackageU
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
12 ÷ 60 V a.c. / d.c. SV-LP-X060 34325 1 0.125 1110 ÷ 415 V a.c. / 110 ÷ 220 V d.c. SV-LP-X400 34326 1 0.125 1
Shunt trips SV-LS
��Accessories to: LST, AST.
��Can be used also with formerly produced types of circuit
breakers LSE, LSN.
��For tripping the circuit breaker LST and tumbler power
switch AST by applied voltage between 70 % and
110 % Uc .
��It contains make contact (version SV-LS-....-1010 make
and break), which can be used for position signalling
of the main contacts of circuit breaker LST and
tumbler power switch AST.
Rated voltage Arrangement Type Product Number Weight PackageU
cof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
24 V a.c. / d.c. 10 SV-LS-X024-1000 35695 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X024-1010 35696 1 0.12 1
48 V a.c. / d.c. 10 SV-LS-X048-1000 35697 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X048-1010 35698 1 0.12 1
110 V a.c. / d.c. 10 SV-LS-X110-1000 35699 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X110-1010 35700 1 0.12 1
230 V a.c. / 220 V d.c. 10 SV-LS-X230-1000 35701 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X230-1010 35702 1 0.12 1
400 V a.c. / 440 V d.c. 10 SV-LS-X400-1000 35703 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X400-1010 35704 1 0.12 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Minia
B23
Miniature circuit breakers
SHUNT TRIPS
Type SV-LP-.. SV-LS-..
Standards EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1
Approval marks
Mounting on the left side of the device on the left side of the device
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Control circuit (coil)
Rated voltage Uc
12 ÷ 60 V a.c. / d.c. 24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c.
110 ÷ 415 V a.c. / 110 ÷ 220 V d.c. 24, 48, 110, 220, 440 V d.c.
Rated frequency fn
40 ÷ 60 Hz 40 ÷ 60 Hz
Break time max. 15 ms 10 ms
Contact
Arrangement of contacts 1) 10 10, 101
Rated operating voltage / current Ue / I
eAC-1 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A
AC-15 230 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 2 A
DC-1 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A
Mechanical endurance 20 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles
Connection
Conductor – rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2
Conductor – flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -30 ÷ 55 °C -30 ÷ 55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary
Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2)
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín
Specifi cations
Dimensions
17.5
26.1 71.5
70
4590
5.5
60
44
SV-LS-..SV-LP-..
24
22
21
C2
C114
17.5
21.45
86
44
72
45
C2
14
C1
64.2
Diagram
1414
C2C2 C1C1
14 21
C2C1 22 24
SV-LS-..-1000SV-LP-.. SV-LS-..-1010
Minia
B24
Miniature circuit breakers
SHUNT TRIPS
Installation of shunt trip on circuit breaker (tumbler switch)
SV-LP-..
1. At mounting the levers of the shunt trip and of the devi-
ce are in OFF position.
2. Insert the lower fastening catch in the device recess.
3. Press the shunt trip to the device so that the upper faste-
ning latch of the shunt trip snaps in the device recess.
4. Check correct function by switching.
SV-LS-..
1. At mounting the levers of the shunt trip and of the device
are in OFF position.
2. From the right slide the longer shaft in the control lever
of the shunt trip and shorter one in the hole of the switching
system of the shunt trip.
3. From the right slide the device on the shunt trip so that
one shaft interconnects control levers and the other the
switching systems.
4. Press the device to the shunt trip and snap the side fastening
clamps of the shunt trip in the device recess.
5. Check correct function by switching.
OFF
OFF
1
22
3
1
LST, AST
SV-LS
OFF
OFF
13.5
9.8
Minia
B25
Miniature circuit breakers
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES
Undervoltage releases SP-LP
��Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN.
��For tripping the circuit breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler
power switch APN at loss of voltage as well as at gra-
dual decrease of voltage between 70 % and 35 % Uc .
��For elimination of closing of circuit breaker LPE, LPN and
tumbler power switch APN, if voltage is lower than 35 %
Uc (switching is possible at voltage higher than 85 % U
c).
��They are often used for protection against device restart
following power blackout.
��Design with 0.2 s, resp. 0.4 s delay for prevention of un-
wanted tripping at short-time power blackout.
Undervoltage releases SP-LS
��Accessories to: LST, AST.
��Can be used also with formerly produced types of circuit
breakers LSE, LSN.
��For tripping the circuit breaker LST and tumbler power
switch AST at loss of voltage as well as at gradual dec-
rease of voltage between 70 % and 35 % Uc .
��For elimination of circuit breaker LST and tumbler po-
wer switch AST, if voltage is lower than 35 % Uc
(swit-
ching is possible at voltage higher than 85 % Uc).
��They are often used for protection against device restart
following power blackout.
��Undervoltage releases SP-LS-....-1010 contain in addi-
tion an auxiliary switch with make and break-make
contact for position signalling of the main contacts
of circuit breaker LST or tumbler power switch AST.
Rated voltage Delay Type Product Number Weight PackageU
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
24 V a.c. - SP-LP-A024 34327 1 0.125 148 V a.c. - SP-LP-A048 34328 1 0.125 1110 V a.c. - SP-LP-A110 34329 1 0.130 1230 V a.c. - SP-LP-A230 34330 1 0.125 1230 V a.c. 0.4 s SP-LP-A230-T004 34331 1 0.130 1400 V a.c. - SP-LP-A400 34332 1 0.130 124 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D024-Y004 34333 1 0.130 148 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D048-Y004 34334 1 0.130 1110 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D110-Y004 34335 1 0.130 1220 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D220-Y004 34336 1 0.125 1400 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D400-Y004 34337 1 0.125 1
Rated voltage Arrangement Type Product Number Weight PackageU
cof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
24 V a.c. - SP-LS-A024 35944 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A024-1010 35945 1 0.12 1
48 V a.c. - SP-LS-A048 35946 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A048-1010 35947 1 0.12 1
110 V a.c. - SP-LS-A110 35948 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A110-1010 35949 1 0.12 1
230 V a.c. - SP-LS-A230 35950 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A230-1010 35951 1 0.12 1
400 V a.c. - SP-LS-A400 35952 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A400-1010 35953 1 0.12 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
1) Delay is activated by interconnection of terminals 1, 2
Minia
B26
Miniature circuit breakers
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES
Type SP-LP-.. SP-LS-..
Standards EN 60947-1 EN 60947-1
Approval marks
Mounting on the left side of the device on the left side of the device
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Control circuit (coil)
Rated voltage Uc
24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c. 24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c.
24, 48, 110, 220, 400 V d.c.
Consumption 2.6 W 2.5 W
Rated frequency fn
40 ÷ 60 Hz 40 ÷ 60 Hz
Break time max. 45 ms 2) 25 ms
Contact
Arrangement of contacts 1) - 10, 101
Rated operating voltage / current Ue / I
eAC-1 - 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A
AC-15 - 230 V a.c. / 2 A
DC-1 - 220 V d.c. / 0,5 A
Mechanical endurance - 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance - 4 000 operating cycles
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2
Conductor flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -30 ÷ 55 °C -30 ÷ 55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary
Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 3) IEC 980:1993 3)
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) The stated time is valid for undelayed undervoltage releases3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín
Specifi cations
Dimensions
Diagram
17.5
26.1 71.5
70
4590
5.5
60
44
SP-LS-..SP-LP-..
24
22
21
13
D1D2
17.5
21.45
86
44
72
45
D2
2
D1
1
64.2
D2
D1
U<
SP-LS-
D2
D1
U<
SP-LP-A..
D2 2
D1 1
U<
SP-LS-D..
D2 21
13D1
U<
22 24
SP-LS-..-1010
Minia
B27
Miniature circuit breakers
UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES
Installation of undervoltage release on circuit breaker (tumbler switch)
SP-LP-..
1. At mounting the levers of undervoltage release and
of the device are in OFF position.
2. Insert the lower fastening catch in the device recess.
3. Press the undervoltage release to the device so that the
upper fastening latch of the undervoltage release snaps
in the device recess.
4. Check correct function by switching.
SP-LS-..
1. At mounting the levers of undervoltage release and of the
device are in OFF position.
2. From the right slide the longer shaft in the control lever
undervoltage releases and shorter one in the hole of the
switching system of the undervoltage release.
3. From the right slide the device on the undervoltage release
so that one shaft interconnects control levers and the other
the switching systems.
4. Press the device to the undervoltage release and snap the
side fastening latches of the undervoltage release in the
device recess.
5. Check correct function by switching.
OFF
OFF
1
22
3
1
LST, AST
SP-LS
OFF
OFF
13.5
9.8
Minia
B28
OD-LP-VU01 Miniature circuit breakers
LOCKING INSERT
��Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN.
��For safe locking of the control lever in off or on position.
��The protective function of the circuit breaker is
functional even in locked position.
��Maximum diameter of lock rod – 5 mm.
��The lock is not included in the package.
Type Product Weight Package code [kg] [pcs]
OD-LP-VU01 37287 0.003 1
Dimensions
64.2 10.517.5
OD-LP-VU01
Mounting of locking insert on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch)
1 2 3
4 Position switched of Position switched on
Minia
B29
OD-LP-VP01 Miniature circuit breakers
SEALING INSERT
��Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN.
��For covering and sealing of terminal screws.
Type Product Weight Packagecode [kg] [pcs]
OD-LP-VP01 37289 0.004 1
Mounting of sealing insert on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch)
1
2 3
Minia
B30
OD-LP-MP01 Miniature circuit breakers
INSULATING BARRIERS
��Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN.
��For additional increase of surface distances between
individual poles of the circuit breaker LPE, LPN or
tumbler power switch APN.
��1 set contains 3 pieces.
Dimensions
15
1
21.2
43.8
OD-LP-MP01
Type Product Weight Packagecode [kg] [number of sets]
OD-LP-MP01 37288 0.002 1
Mounting of insulation barrier on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch)
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Minia
C
��Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent
protection OLE (6 kA).................................................................................................................. C2
��Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent
protection OLI (10 kA)................................................................................................................. C6
��Accessories for OLE, OLI........................................................................................................... C12
��Residual current circuit breakers OFE (6 kA)............................................................... C14
��Residual current circuit breakers OFI (10 kA).............................................................. C17
��Accessories for OFE, OFI............................................................................................................ C22
��Basic terms, symbols and break times........................................................................... C24
Minia
C2
OLE Residual current circuit breakers
��The device is a combination of residual current circuit
breaker and circuit breaker.
��For building, housing and similar installations up to 16 A,
230 V a.c.
��For protection:
– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn
≤ 30 mA)
– against dangerous contact with dead parts
– against fi re
– against overload
– against short-circuit (breaking capacity Icn
= 6 kA)
��Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 61009-1.
��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switch
PS-LV-1100 on the right side of the device.
Accessories to OLE
Auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100-K page C12
Interconnecting busbars S2L-... page E52
Terminal extensions AS-25-S, AS-50-S-AL01 page E57
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA)
6 0003
IΔn
In
Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] Type Productcode Type Product
codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
306 OLE-6B-1N-030AC 38313 OLE-6C-1N-030AC 38320 2 0.25 1
10 OLE-10B-1N-030AC 38314 OLE-10C-1N-030AC 38321 2 0.25 116 OLE-16B-1N-030AC 38315 OLE-16C-1N-030AC 38322 2 0.25 1
Type OLE
Standards EN 61009-1
Approval marks
Number of poles 2
Tripping characteristics B, C
Type AC
Rated current In 6 ÷ 16 A
Rated residual current IΔn 30 mA
Rated operating voltage Ue 230 V a.c.
Min. operating voltage 1) Umin 100 V a.c.
Max. operating voltage Umax 255 V a.c.
Rated frequency fn 50 ÷ 60 Hz
Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn 6 kA
Rated residual making and breaking capacity IΔm 6 kA
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp 6 kV
Mechanical endurance 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 10 000 operating cycles
Energy limitation class 3
Degree of protection IP20
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2)
Conductor flexible with a sleeve 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2)
Torque 2.5÷ 3 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -5 ÷ 40 °C
Working position arbitrary1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) For detailed connection of conductors see the table on page C5
Specifi cations
Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type AC� They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).
Minia
C3
OLE Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA)
Diagram
1
2 N
N
Dimensions
OLE
36
90
44
64
70
7
73.3
9045
Characteristic B Characteristic CI
n [A] L-Pole N-Pole Power loss L-Pole N-Pole Power loss
Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P [W] Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P [W]
6 72 2.1 2.7 52 2.1 1.910 15.4 2.1 1.8 13.4 2.1 1.616 9.6 2.1 3 8.7 2.1 2.8
Internal impedance Z and powers losses P
In
Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -10 °C up to + 40 °C [A] 2)
[A] -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C
6 6.8 6.7 6.4 6.2 6 5.710 11.4 11.2 10.7 10.4 10 9.5
16 18.2 17.9 17.1 16.6 16 15.22) Reference temperature: 30 °C
Correction of rated currents
OLE
Minia
C4
OLE Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA)
Characteristics
��Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause
current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.).
The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In
.
��Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current
surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.).
The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In
.
Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 61009-1
Thermal releaseTripping characteristic type
B, C
Conventional non-tripping current Int
for t ≥ 1 h Int
= 1.13 In
Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h I
t = 1.45 I
n
Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s and I
n ≤ 32 A
I3
= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s and I
n > 32 A
t - break time of the circuit breaker
Electromagnetic releaseTripping characteristic type
B C
Current I4 for 0.1 s < t < 45 s (for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I4
= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s (for I
n > 32 A)
0.1 s < t < 15 s (for In
≤ 32 A)I
4 = 5 I
n0.1 s < t < 30 s (for In
> 32 A)
Current I5 for t < 0.1 s I
5 = 5 I
nI
5 = 10 I
n
t - break time of the circuit breaker
1
2
5
10
30
60
120
min
.
10 000
5 000
1 000
500
100
50
10
5
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.002
0.006
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80
B C
B C
x In
1.13
I n
1.45
I n
t[s
]v
At ambient temperature +30 °C
Characteristics I2t
OLE-..B-..
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
1000
0
6 A
10 A
16 A
OLE-..C-..
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
1500
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
1000
0
6 A
10 A
16 A
Minia
C5
OLE Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA)
Connection of conductors and interconnecting busbars
Number of connected conductors Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve
Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 2
1 conductor 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
2 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)
2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 6 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
3 conductors 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 2,5 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)
2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
4 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)
Connection range
Terminal system
��Possibility of connection:
- conductors of various cross-sections
- up to 4 conductors in the terminal
- conductor of cross-section up to 35 mm2
��Design: two levels of terminals with a fi xed barrier between them.
��Connection: each level enables connection of both the conductor
and interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars with pins, type
„S“ – see page E52). This is possible from both sides of the device. For
connection range see the table below.
* Valid only for stranded conductor, for solid conductor the max cross-section is 16 mm2
Level 1
Barrier
Level 2
Advantages
��Easy connection and check of conductors at simultaneous
connection of interconnecting busbar – the busbar does not cover the
conductor connecting place.
Minia
C6
OLI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) ��The device is a combination of residual current circuit
breaker and circuit breaker.
��For building, commercial and industrial installations
up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.
��For protection:
– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn
≤ 30 mA)
– against dangerous contact with dead parts
– against fi re
– against overload
– against short-circuit (breaking capacity Icn
= 10 kA)
��Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 61009-1.
��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switch
PS-LV-1100 on the right side of the device.
Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection. type AC� They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).
IΔn
In
Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] Type Product code Type Product
codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
30
6 OLI-6B-1N-030AC 38271 OLI-6C-1N-030AC 38278 2 0.25 110 OLI-10B-1N-030AC 38272 OLI-10C-1N-030AC 38279 2 0.25 116 OLI-16B-1N-030AC 38273 OLI-16C-1N-030AC 38280 2 0.25 120 OLI-20B-1N-030AC 38274 OLI-20C-1N-030AC 38281 2 0.25 125 OLI-25B-1N-030AC 38275 OLI-25C-1N-030AC 38282 2 0.25 132 OLI-32B-1N-030AC 38276 OLI-32C-1N-030AC 38283 2 0.25 140 OLI-40B-1N-030AC 38277 OLI-40C-1N-030AC 38284 2 0.25 1
300
6 - - OLI-6C-1N-300AC 38285 2 0.25 110 - - OLI-10C-1N-300AC 38286 2 0.25 116 - - OLI-16C-1N-300AC 38287 2 0.25 120 - - OLI-20C-1N-300AC 38288 2 0.25 125 - - OLI-25C-1N-300AC 38289 2 0.25 132 - - OLI-32C-1N-300AC 38290 2 0.25 140 - - OLI-40C-1N-300AC 38291 2 0.25 1
10 0003
Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type A� They react to both sine-wave residual current and pulsating direct residual current (type A).
IΔn
In
Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] Type Product code Type Product
codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
30
6 OLI-6B-1N-030A 38292 OLI-6C-1N-030A 38299 2 0.25 110 OLI-10B-1N-030A 38293 OLI-10C-1N-030A 38300 2 0.25 116 OLI-16B-1N-030A 38294 OLI-16C-1N-030A 38301 2 0.25 120 OLI-20B-1N-030A 38295 OLI-20C-1N-030A 38302 2 0.25 125 OLI-25B-1N-030A 38296 OLI-25C-1N-030A 38303 2 0.25 132 OLI-32B-1N-030A 38297 OLI-32C-1N-030A 38304 2 0.25 140 OLI-40B-1N-030A 38298 OLI-40C-1N-030A 38305 2 0.25 1
300
6 - - OLI-6C-1N-300A 38306 2 0.25 110 - - OLI-10C-1N-300A 38307 2 0.25 116 - - OLI-16C-1N-300A 38308 2 0.25 120 - - OLI-20C-1N-300A 38309 2 0.25 125 - - OLI-25C-1N-300A 38310 2 0.25 132 - - OLI-32C-1N-300A 38311 2 0.25 140 - - OLI-40C-1N-300A 38312 2 0.25 1
10 0003
-25
Minia
C7
OLI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA)
IΔn
In
Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] Type Productcode Type Product
codeof modules [kg] [pcs]
30
10 OLI-10B-1N-030AC-G 38328 OLI-10C-1N-030AC-G 38333 2 0.25 116 OLI-16B-1N-030AC-G 38329 OLI-16C-1N-030AC-G 38334 2 0.25 120 OLI-20B-1N-030AC-G 38330 OLI-20C-1N-030AC-G 38335 2 0.25 125 OLI-25B-1N-030AC-G 38331 OLI-25C-1N-030AC-G 38336 2 0.25 1
��They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).
��Special residual current circuit breakers which reduce
the number of undesirable releases.
��It is recommended to install them before the equipment
causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents – heavy
induction motors, large heating bodies, interference
suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.
��Surge resistance: 3 kA (8/20 μs).
��Release delay: 10 ms.
Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type AC-G
Accessories to OLI
Auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100-K page C12
Interconnecting busbars S2L-... page E52
Terminal extensions AS-25-S, AS-50-AL01 page E57
10 0003
G-25
Minia
C8
OLI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA)
Specifi cations
Type OLI-..AC OLI-..A OLI-..AC-G
Standards EN 61009-1 EN 61009-1 EN 61009-1
Approval marks
Number of poles 2 2 2
Tripping characteristics B, C B, C B, C
Type AC A AC-G
Rated current In
6 ÷ 40 A 6 ÷ 40 A 10 ÷ 25 A
Rated residual current IΔn
30, 300 mA 30, 300 mA 30 mA
Rated operating voltage Ue
230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Min. operating voltage 1) Umin
100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c.
Max. operating voltage Umax
255 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 255 V a.c.
Rated frequency fn
50 ÷ 60 Hz 50 ÷ 60 Hz 50 ÷ 60 Hz
Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn
10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
Rated residual making and breaking capacity IΔm
10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp
6 kV 6 kV 6 kV
Release delay - - 10 ms
Mechanical endurance 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles
Energy limitation class 3 3 3
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2)
Conductor flexible with a sleeve 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2)
Torque 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -5 ÷ 40 °C -25 ÷ 40 °C -25 ÷ 40 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) For detailed connection of conductors see the table on page C11
G
Characteristic B Characteristic C
L-Pole N-Pole Power loss L-Pole N-Pole Power lossI
n [A] Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P
v [W] Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P
v [W]
6 72 2.1 2.7 52 2.1 1.910 15.4 2.1 1.8 13.4 2.1 1.6
16 9.6 2.1 3 8.7 2.1 2.8
20 7.1 2.1 3.7 6.1 2.1 3.3
25 6.1 2.1 5.1 6 2.1 5.1
32 4.1 1.5 5.7 4.1 1.5 5.7
40 3.4 1.5 7.8 3.4 1.5 7.8
Internal impedance Z and powers losses P
In
Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -25°C up to + 40°C [A] 2)
[A] -25 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C
6 7.20 7.08 6.8 6.7 6.4 6.2 6 5.710 12 11.80 11.4 11.2 10.7 10.4 10 9.5
16 19.20 18.88 18.2 17.9 17.1 16.6 16 15.2
20 24 23.60 22.8 22.4 21.4 20.8 20 19
25 30 29.50 28.5 28 26.8 26 25 23.8
32 38.40 37.76 36.5 35.8 34.2 33.3 32 30.4
40 48 47.20 45.6 44.8 42.8 41.6 40 382) Reference temperature 30 °C
Correction of rated currents
Minia
C9
OLI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA)
Diagram
1
2 N
N
OLI
Dimensions
OLI
36
90
44
64
70
7
73.3
9045
Minia
C10
OLI Residual current circuit breakers
Characteristics
��Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause
current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.).
The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In
.
��Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current
surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.).
The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In
.
Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 61009-1
Thermal releaseTripping characteristic type
B, C
Conventional non-tripping current Int
for t ≥ 1 h Int
= 1.13 In
Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h I
t = 1.45 I
n
Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s and I
n ≤ 32 A
I3
= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s and I
n > 32 A
t - break time of the circuit breaker
Electromagnetic releaseTripping characteristic type
B C
Current I4 for 0.1 s < t < 45 s (for I
n ≤ 32 A)
I4
= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s (for I
n > 32 A)
0.1 s < t < 15 s (for In
≤ 32 A)I
4 = 5 I
n0.1 s < t < 30 s (for In
> 32 A)
Current I5 for t < 0.1 s I
5 = 5 I
nI
5 = 10 I
n
t - break time of the circuit breaker
Characteristics I2t
OLI-..B-..
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
6 A
10 A
25, 32, 40 A
16, 20 A
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA)
1
2
5
10
30
60
120
min
.
10 000
5 000
1 000
500
100
50
10
5
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.001
0.002
0.006
1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80
B C
B C
x In
1.13
I n
1.45
I n
t[s
]v
At ambient temperature +30 °C
OLI-..C-..
I [A]p
It
[As]
22
20
30
4050
70
100
150
1 500
15 000
200
300
400500
700
1 000
2 000
5 000
7 000
3 000
4 000
10 000
20 000
30 000
40 00050 000
90 000
70 000
100
0
150
0
800
900
200
0
300
0
400
0
500
0
600
0
700
08
000
900
010
000
2000
0
6 A
10 A
25, 32, 40 A
16, 20 A
Minia
C11
OLI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA)
Connection of conductors and interconnecting busbars
Number of connected conductors Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve
Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 2
1 conductor 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
2 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)
2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 6 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
3 conductors 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 2,5 mm2)
1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)
2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)
4 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)
Connection range
Terminal system
Advantages
��Design: two levels of terminals with a fi xed barrier between them.
��Connection: each level enables connection of both the conductor and
interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars with pins, type „S“ – see
page E52). This is possible from both sides of the device. For connection range
see the table below.
��Safety: the terminals are equipped with sliding plastic caps, which eff ectively
increase protection against dangerous contact with live parts.
��Possibility of connection:
- conductors of various cross sections
- up to 4 conductors in the terminal
- conductor of cross-section up to 35 mm2
��Easy connection and check of conductors at simultaneous connection
of interconnecting busbar – the busbar does not cover the conductor
connecting place.
��Mounting/demounting on/from „DIN“ rails
��New system of latches enables:
- very quick mounting and demounting by hand, without any tool needed.
- withdrawal/replacement of the residual current circuit breaker from a row of devices
interconnected by the interconnecting busbar up or down without interruption
of adjacent circuit or removal of the busbar.
Level 1
Barrier
Level 2
Minia
C12
Residual current circuit breakers
Type PS-LV-..
Standards EN 60947-5-1, EN 62019
Approval marks
Arrangement of contacts 1) 11
Rated operating voltage / current Ue / I
e AC-13400 V a.c. / 2 A
230 V a.c. / 6 A
AC-14400 V a.c. / 2 A
230 V a.c. / 6 A
DC-13
220 V d.c. / 1 A
110 V d.c. / 1 A
60 V d.c. / 3 A
24 V d.c. / 6 A
Mechanical endurance 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 10 000 operating cycles
Mounting on the right side of the device
Degree of protection IP20
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Conductor flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ 40 °C
Working position arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
ACCESSORIES FOR OLE, OLI
��Installation: on the right side of the residual current
circuit breaker with overload protection.
��For signalling the position of contacts of residual current
circuit breakers with overload protection.
Auxiliary switch
Specifi cations
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts code of modules [kg] [pcs]
111) PS-LV-1100-K 38938 0.5 0.05 1 1)Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Auxiliary switch with handle adapter
Minia
C13
Residual current circuit breakers
ACCESSORIES FOR OLE, OLI
Diagram
13 21
14 22
PS-LV-1100Dimensions
90
9 6
45 90
73.3
44
64
68.5
PS-LV-1100
Installation of auxiliary switch
OLI, OLE PS-LV-1100
OD-OL-NR01
OLI, OLE PS-LV-1100max. 2x
12
4
5
5
5
5
5
3
3
PS-LV-1100
1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the
device are in OFF position.
2. Slide the handle adapter on the control lever of the
device from the right.
3. Swing away the fastening tapes.
4. Slide the auxiliary switch on the device from the right
to interconnect the shaft of the control lever and the
switching system.
5. Secure the fastening tapes.
6. Check correct function by switching.
Minia
C14
OFE Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA) ��They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).
��For protection:
– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn
≤ 30 mA)
– against dangerous contact with dead parts
– against fi re or short-circuit in reduced insulation
capacity of electrical equipment (IΔn
≤ 300 mA)
��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switches
PS-OF-1100 on the right side of the device.
��Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).
��Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPE
(LPN) by means of interconnecting busbars.
��N-pole of residual current circuit breakers in switching
on it closes before and in switching off it opens after
the other poles.
Accessories to OFE
Auxiliary switch PS-OF-1100 page C22
Interconnecting busbars G2L-1000-16, G4L-1000-16 page E52
Terminal extensions AS-25-G, AS-25-S page E57
6 000Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC� Standard type for common use in building and housing installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
30 25 OFE-25-2-030AC 35299 2 0.28 130 40 OFE-40-2-030AC 35301 2 0.28 1300 25 OFE-25-2-300AC 35300 2 0.28 1300 40 OFE-40-2-300AC 35302 2 0.28 1
Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC
� Standard type for common use in building and housing installations up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c.
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
3025 OFE-25-4-030AC 35303 4 0.52 140 OFE-40-4-030AC 35305 4 0.52 163 OFE-63-4-030AC 35307 4 0.52 1
30040 OFE-40-4-300AC 35306 4 0.52 163 OFE-63-4-300AC 35308 4 0.52 1
Minia
C15
OFE Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA)
Type OFE-..-2-.. OFE-..-4-..
Standards EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755
Approval marks
Number of poles 2 4
Type AC AC
Rated current In
25, 40 A 25, 40, 63 A
Rated residual current IΔn
30, 300 mA 30, 300 mA
Rated operating voltage Ue
230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c.
Min. operating voltage 1) Umin
100 V a.c. 100 V a.c.
Max. operating voltage Umax
240 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c.
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated conditional short-circuit current: 3) Inc
with back-up fuse In ≤ 63 A gG 6 kA -
with back-up fuse In ≤ 100 A gG - 6 kA
with back-up miniature circuit breaker LPE, LPN, L ST with In max. 1:1 6 kA 6 kA
Rated making and breaking capacity Im
500 A 800 A
Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA
Release delay - -
Mechanical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles
EElectrical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Connection
Conductor 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2
Torque 3 Nm 3 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary
Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2)
1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín3) Rated conditional short-circuit current relates to short-circuit protection. It is also possible to protect residual current circuit breakers against overload by circuit breaker and fuse-link. In this case I
n of MCB has to be
equal or lower than In of RCCB (In MCB ≤ In RCCB) a I
n and In of fuse-link has to be by one degree lower than I
n of RCCB (In of fuse-link by one degree lower ≤ In RCCB)
Specifi cations
Dimensions
36 72
64
447
9045
OFE-..-2-.. OFE-..4-..
Powers losses POFE-...-2-... OFE-...-4-...
In
[A]
IΔn
[A]
P 1)
[W/pole]
In
[A]
IΔn
[A]
P 1)
[W/pole]
250.03 2 25 0.03 1.20.30 1
400.03 3.2
400.03 4 0.30 1.650.30 2.5
630.03 4
1) Mean values 0.30 3.21) Mean values
Minia
C16
OFE Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA)
Diagram
1
2 N
N 1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N
OFE-..-2-.. OFE-..-4-..
1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N
OFE-..-4-..
1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N
OFE-..-4-..
NL L1 L2 L3
residual current circuit breaker 4-pole
in 1-phase circuits with N-pole
residual current circuit breaker 4-pole
in 3-phase circuits without N-pole
Connection
Minia
C17
OFI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA)
Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC
��They react to sine-wave residual current.
��Standard type for common use in building and
industrial installations up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c.
��Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).
Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC
��They react to sine-wave residual current.
��Standard type for common use in building and
industrial installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.
��Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).
��For protection:
– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn
≤ 30 mA)
– against dangerous contact with dead parts
– against fi re or short-circuit in reduced insulation
capacity of electrical equipment
��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switches
PS-OF-1100 or PS-OF125-1100 on the right side of the
device.
��Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPN
(LPE)) by means of interconnecting busbars.
��N-pole of residual current circuit breakers in switching
on it closes before and in switching off it opens after
the other poles.
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
3025 OFI-25-2-030AC 36797 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030AC 36800 2 0.28 1
10025 OFI-25-2-100AC 36798 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-100AC 36801 2 0.28 1
30025 OFI-25-2-300AC 36799 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-300AC 36802 2 0.28 1
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
30
25 OFI-25-4-030AC 36806 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030AC 36809 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030AC 36813 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-030AC 36817 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-030AC 36819 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-030AC 36823 4 0.52 1
100
25 OFI-25-4-100AC 36807 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100AC 36810 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100AC 36814 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-100AC 36820 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-100AC 36824 4 0.52 1
300
25 OFI-25-4-300AC 36808 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-300AC 36811 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-300AC 36815 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-300AC 36818 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-300AC 36821 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-300AC 36825 4 0.52 1
500
40 OFI-40-4-500AC 36812 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-500AC 36816 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-500AC 36822 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-500AC 36826 4 0.52 1
10 000
10 000
Minia
C18
OFI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type A
��They react to both sine-wave residual current and
pulsating direct residual current (type A).
��Standard type for common use in building and
industrial installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.
��Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).
-2510 000
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
30
25 OFI-25-4-030A 35280 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030A 35283 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030A 35287 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-030A 36830 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-030A 36831 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-030A 36835 4 0.52 1
100
25 OFI-25-4-100A 35281 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100A 35284 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100A 35288 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-100A 36832 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-100A 36836 4 0.52 1
300
25 OFI-25-4-300A 35282 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-300A 35285 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-300A 35289 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-300A 35291 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-300A 36833 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-300A 36837 4 0.52 1
500
40 OFI-40-4-500A 35286 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-500A 35290 4 0.52 1
100 OFI-100-4-500A 36834 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-500A 36838 4 0.52 1
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
10 16 OFI-16-2-010A 35273 2 0.28 1
3025 OFI-25-2-030A 35274 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030A 35277 2 0.28 1
10025 OFI-25-2-100A 35275 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-100A 35278 2 0.28 1
30025 OFI-25-2-300A 35276 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-300A 35279 2 0.28 1
Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type A
��They react to both sine-wave residual current and
pulsating direct residual current (type A).
��Standard type for common use in building and
industrial installations up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c.
��Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).
-2510 000
Minia
C19
OFI Residual current circuit breakers
Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type A-G
��They react to both sine-wave residual current and
pulsating direct residual current (type A).
Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC-G
��They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA)Residual current circuit breakers, type AC-G, A-G
��Special residual current circuit breakers which reduce
the number of undesirable releases.
��Release delay: 10 ms.
��Surge current resistance up to 3 kA (8/20 μs ).
��It is recommended to install them before the equip-
ment causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents
– heavy induction motors, large heating bodies, inter-
ference suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.
��For protection:
– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn
≤ 30 mA)
– against dangerous contact with dead parts
– against fi re or short-circuit in reduced insulation
capacity of electrical equipment.
��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switches
PS-OF-1100 on the right side of the device.
��Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPN
(LPE)) by means of interconnecting busbars.
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
3025 OFI-25-2-030AC-G 38437 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030AC-G 38438 2 0.28 1
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
3025 OFI-25-4-030A-G 35292 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030A-G 35294 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030A-G 36839 4 0.52 1
10025 OFI-25-4-100A-G 35293 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100A-G 35295 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100A-G 35296 4 0.52 1
-2510 000 G
Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC-G
��They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
3025 OFI-25-4-030AC-G 38439 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030AC-G 38440 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030AC-G 38441 4 0.52 1
10025 OFI-25-4-100AC-G 38443 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100AC-G 38444 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100AC-G 38445 4 0.52 1
Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type A-G
��They react to both sine-wave residual current and
pulsating direct residual current (type A).
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
3025 OFI-25-2-030A-G 38447 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030A-G 38448 2 0.28 1
-2510 000 G
-2510 000 G
-2510 000 G
Minia
C20
OFI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA)
��They react to both sine-wave residual current and
pulsating direct residual current (type A).
��Special residual current circuit breakers which reduce
the number of undesirable releases and enable
selective switching of residual current circuit breakers.
IΔn
In
Type Product Number Weight Package
[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
30040 OFI-40-4-300A-S 35297 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-300A-S 35298 4 0.52 1
S
Accessories to OFI
Auxiliary switches PS-OF-1100, PS-OF125-1100 page C22
Interconnecting busbars G2L-1000-16, G4L-1000-16, S4L-1000-16 page E52
Terminal extensions AS-25-G, AS-25-S page E57
Type OFI-..-2-.. OFI-..-4-..OFI-100-4-.. OFI-125-4-..
OFI-..-2-..-G OFI-..-4-..-G OFI-..-4-..-S
Standards EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755
Approval marks
Number of poles 2 4 4 2 4 4
Type AC, A AC, A AC, A AC-G, A-G AC- G, A-G A- S
Rated curren In
16, 25, 40 A 25, 40, 63, 80 A 100, 125 A 25, 40 A 25, 40, 63 A 40, 63 A
Rated residual current IΔn
10, 30, 100, 300 mA 10, 30, 100, 300, 500 mA 30, 100, 300, 500 mA 30 mA 30, 100 mA 300 mA
Rated operating voltage Ue
230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c.
Min. operating voltage 1) Umin
100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c.
Max. operating voltage Umax
240 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c.
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Rated conditional short-circuit current: Inc
with back-up fuse In ≤ 63 A gG 10 kA - - 10 kA - -
with back-up fuse In ≤ 100 A gG - 10 kA 10 kA - 10 kA 10 kA
with back-up MCB LPN, LST with In max. 1:1 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
with back-up MCB LPE with In max. 1:1 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA
Rated making and breaking capacity Im
500 A 800 A 1 250 A 500 A 800 A 800 A
Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 5 kA
Release delay - - - 10 ms 10 ms 40 ms
Mechanical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Connection
Conductor 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2
Torque 2.5 Nm 3 Nm 3.5 Nm 3 Nm 3 Nm 3 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes yes yes yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature type AC -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C
type A -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary
Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2) - IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2)
1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín3) Rated conditional short-circuit current is related to short-circuit protection. It is also possible to protect residual current circuit breakers against overload by circuit breaker and fuse-link. In this case I
n of MCB
has to be equal or lower than In of RCCB (I
n MCB ≤ I
n RCCB) and In of fuse-link has to be by one degree lower than I
n of RCCB (I
n of fuse-link by one degree lower ≤ I
n RCCB)
Specifi cations
S
-2510 000
G G
Powers losses POFI-...-2-... OFI-...-4-...
In
[A]
IΔn
[A]
P 1)
[W/pole]
In
[A]
IΔn
[A]
P 1)
[W/pole]
16 0.01 2.525
0.03; 0.1 1.2
250.03; 0.1 2 0.3 0.65
0.30 140
0.03; 0.1 3.2
400.03; 0.1 4 0.3; 0.5 1.65
0.30 2.563
0.03; 0.1 41) Mean values 0.3; 0.5 3.2
80 0.3 4.81) Mean values
��It is recommended to install them before the equipment
causing short-time (up to 40 ms) stray currents
– heavy induction motors, large heating bodies,
interference suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.
��Surge resistance: 5 kA (8/20 μs).
��Release delay: 40 ms.
Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, selective, type A-S
Minia
C21
OFI Residual current circuit breakers
RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Dimensions
Diagram
36 72
64
447
9045
OFI-..-2-..
OFI-125-4-..
OFI-..-4-..
72 44
64
6
71
45 87
1
2 N
N 1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N 1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N
OFI-..-2-.. OFI-..-4-.. OFI-100-4-.. , OFI-125-4-..
Connectionresidual current circuit breaker 4-pole
25 ÷ 80 Ain 1-phase circuits with N-pole
residual current circuit breaker 4-pole 100 and 125 A
in 1-phase circuits with N-pole
residual current circuit breaker 4-polein 3-phase circuits without N-pole
1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N
OFI-..-4-..
NL
1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N
OFI-..-4-..
L1 L2 L3
1
2
3
4
5
6 N
N
OFI-..-4-..
NL
Minia
C22
Residual current circuit breakers
ACCESSORIES FOR OFE, OFI
Accessories to Type Product Arrangement Number Weight Packagecode of contacts 1) of modules [kg] [pcs]
OFI, OFE do 80 A PS-OF-1100 35309 11 0.5 0.07 1OFI 100, 125 A PS-OF125-1100 36840 11 0.5 0.07 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Type PS-OF-1100 PS-OF125-1100
Standards EN 62019 EN 62019
EN 60947-5-1
Approval marks
Arrangement of contacts 1) 11 11
Rated operating voltage / current Ue/I
eAC-12 230 V a.c. / 6 A 230 V a.c. / 5 A
AC-14 230 V a.c. / 3.6 A -
DC-12 220 V d.c. / 1 A 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A
Min. voltage / current 24 V a.c. / 50 mA 24 V a.c. / 50 mA
Short-circuit protection MCB 6 A, characteristic B or C MCB 6 A, characteristic B or C
fuse 6 A gG fuse 6 A gG
Electrical endurance 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Mounting on the right side of the device on the right side of the device
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Conductor flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Specifi cations
Auxiliary switches for residual current circuit breakers
��Accessories to: OFI and OFE.
��Installation: on the right side of the residual current
circuit breaker.
��For signalling the position of contacts of residual
current circuit breakers.
Minia
C23
Residual current circuit breakers
ACCESSORIES FOR OFE, OFI
Dimensions
Diagram
9
9045
7
64
44
PS-OF-1100
13
21
14
22
11
23
24
12
9 436
60
45 87
PS-OF125-1100
PS-OF-1100 PS-OF125-1100
13 11
14 1222 24
21 23
Minia
C24
Residual current circuit breakers
BASIC TERMS, SYMBOLS AND BREAK TIMES
��Rated residual operating current IΔn
is the value of
residual current IΔn
specifi ed by the manufacturer, at
which the residual current circuit breaker must switch
out under specifi ed conditions. Alternating residual
current must by cut off by the residual current circuit
breaker within (0.5 ÷ 1) IΔn
��Rated current In is the value of current specifi ed by the
manufacturer, which can be transferred by the residual
current circuit breaker continuously. So the current In
can pass through the contacts for an unlimited time.
Therefore it is, for instance, possible to use a residual
current circuit breaker with In = 25 A in the circuit with
max. current up to 25 A. For protection against overload
of the residual current circuit breakers OFI, OFE it is
recommended to use the circuit breakers LPE, LPN, LST
with rated current Incircuit breaker ≤ I
n RCCB
��Rated operating voltage Ue is the voltage the residual
current circuit breaker is to be connected to and which
properties are related to. The connected voltage has no
eff ect on the device function but on the function of the
test circuit and isolation properties.
��Rated frequency fn
is the frequency the residual current
circuit breaker is designed for and at which it works
correctly under stated conditions. Majority of residual
current circuit breakers are designed for fn = 50 to 60 Hz.
As the residual current circuit breaker function is based on
the induction principle, the residual current behaviour and
frequency show an eff ect upon tripping. When using a
device designed for 50/60 Hz in a network with a diff erent
frequency, the user must count on a change of the tripping
threshold i.e. a change of IΔn
��Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc
– short-
circuit strength. The function and design principle
does not allow to use the residual current circuit
breaker for protection against short-circuit. For circuit
protection it is necessary to use a circuit breaker or a
fuse. These elements cut the short-circuited circuit
safely off . The residual current circuit breaker must only
withstand the through-going short-circuit current. The
amplitude of the maximum through current is defi ned
as rated conditional short-circuit current Inc
. The short-
circuit strength is then expressed by the current Inc
. For
example, on the rating plate, Inc
= 10 kA is expressed by
the following symbol:
��Ambient temperature T for the residual current circuit
breakers is (-5 ÷ +40) °C according to almost all
international standards. Some residual current circuit
breakers work in an extended range (-25 ÷ +40) °C.
This possibility is identifi ed by the following symbol on
the rating plate:
��Residual current circuit breaker – type AC – reacts to
sine-wave residual current – it is used in conventional
AC networks
��Residual current circuit breaker – type A – reacts
to sine-wave alternating and pulsating direct residual
currents – it is used in conventional AC networks and the
networks with phase power regulation etc.
��Residual current circuit breaker – type G – special
residual current circuit breaker reducing the number of
undesirable cut-off s. It is mainly installed before the
devices causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents.
Identifi cation: G
Surge resistance: 3 kA (8/20 μs)
Release delay: 10 ms
��Residual current circuit breaker – type S – special
residual current circuit breaker, which is mainly
intended for selective switching of residual current
circuit breakers and reduction of undesirable cut-off s.
It is installed before the devices causing short-time
(up to 40 ms) stray currents.
Identifi cation: S
Surge resistance: 5 kA (8/20 μs)
Release delay: 40 ms
Selective (discriminating) switching means that if the
residual current circuit breakers are connected in series,
only the device in which circuit a failure occurs will cut
off the current. More specifi cally, only the device in which
the tripping residual current appears due to a failure
in the protected circuit will turn off the current. The
advantage consists in maintaining the power supply in
the other circuits not aff ected by the failure.
Such function of the protected circuit is achieved by
connection of the selective residual current circuit breaker
(see Fig. 1) before the standard or G type residual current
circuit breaker, with the following ratio of rated residual
currents:
Fig. 1. Simplifi ed example of selective
connection of residual current circuit breakers
IΔn S
≥ 3 x IΔn -,G
IΔnS
rated residual operating current of the selective
residual current circuit breaker
IΔn -,G
rated residual operating current of standard or G type
residual current circuit breaker
The main reason of selective disconnecting of circuits is
higher time delay of the selective residual current circuit
breakers in tripping (compared to standard or G type
ones).
��Residual current circuit breaker with overcurrent
protection – this device is a combination of residual
current circuit breaker and circuit breaker with 2-module
width – it saves the space in the switchboard compared
to conventional connection of two separate devices
(3 modules). This eliminates the problem of back-up
protection and interconnection. The disadvantage
of such a design compared to conventional one is that
it is not possible to identify whether the tripping was
actuated by the residual current circuit breaker or by the
circuit breaker.
10 000
-25
G
S
load
I = 0.3 AΔnS
I = 0.1 AΔn- I = 0.03 AΔnG
load
Min. time delay and break times of the residual current circuit breakersType of residual current circuit breakers
standard G SMin. time delay T
v s - 0.01 0.04
Break times t at IΔn s t ≤ 0.3 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.3 0.13 ≤ t ≤ 0.5
(according to EN 61008-1) at 2IΔn s t ≤ 0.15 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.15 0.06 ≤ t ≤ 0.2
at 5IΔn s t ≤ 0.04 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.04 0.05 ≤ t ≤ 0.15
at 500 A s t ≤ 0.04 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.04 0.04 ≤ t ≤ 0.15
note no bottom limits of the break time value 0.01 s is not given by standard break times are valid for the residual current circuit breaker with I
n ≥ 25 A and I
Δn > 0.03 A
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
Minia
D
��Overview of overvoltage protections............................................................................... D2
��Lightning current arresters - type 1.................................................................................. D3
��Combined lightning current and surge voltage
arresters - type 1 + type 2...................................................................................................... D8
��Surge voltage arresters - type 2......................................................................................... D12
��Surge voltage arresters - type 3......................................................................................... D16
��Surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic systems................................................... D19
��Replaceable modules.............................................................................................................. D21
��Recommendations for design, installation and measurement
of overvoltage protections..................................................................................................... D22
Minia
D2
Overvoltage protections
OVERVIEW OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
Design T1 T1 + T2Preview
Type SJB SJBplus SJBC SVBC
Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11
type 1 type 1 type 1 + type 2 type 1 + type 2
Maximum constant operating voltage Uc
350 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 275 V a.c.
Lightning current (10/350 μs) / pole Iimp
25 kA 50 kA 25 kA 12,5 kA
Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole In
25 kA 50 kA 25 kA 20 kA
Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole Imax
- - 40 kA 50 kA
Voltage protection level Up
≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 2.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV
Replaceable module � - � -
Optical signalling � - � �
Remote signalling � - � �
� available, - unavailable
Design T2 T3 T2 FVPreview
Type SVC-275 SVC-350 SVM-440 SVD-253 SVD-335 SVF
Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11
type 2 type 2 type 2 type 3 type 3 type 2
Maximum constant operating voltage Uc
275 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 253 V a.c 335 V a.c. 1000 V / 600 V d.c.
Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole In
20 kA 20 kA 20 kA 3 kA 1,5 kA 15 kA
Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole Imax
40 kA 40 kA 40 kA 10 kA 4,5 kA 30 kA / 40 kA
Off -load voltage Uoc
- - - 6 kV 4 kV -
Voltage protection level Up
≤ 1.35 kV ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 2.2 kV ≤ 1.1 kV ≤ 1.2 kV ≤ 5 kV / 3 kV
Replaceable module - � � � � �
Optical signalling � � � � � �
Remote signalling � � � � � �
� available, - unavailable
FV - intended mainly for photovoltaic sources
Minia
D3
Overvoltage protections
LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1��For protection of electric networks and equipment against
overvoltage from direct or indirect lightning strokes in
the arresting equipment of buildings, LV lines etc.
��For protection of electric networks and equipment in resi-
dential, commercial and industrial buildings etc.
��It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave
power caused by direct or indirect lightning stroke.
��Use: as the fi rst stage (coarse protection) in three degree
scale of protection against overvoltage – type 1 accor-
ding to EN 61643-11.
��For further information on OEZ off er of overvoltage
protection see „Overvoltage protections – Application
manual”.
Lightning current arresters SJB-25E-...
��Lightning current arresters designed for building,
residential, commercial and other similar installations
classed in group „big installation threat“.
��For four-wire TN-C network, use SJB-25E-3-MZS , and
for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use SJB-25E-3N-MZS.
��The main element is an enclosed spark gap with
electronic ignition release able to arrest lightning
current up to 25 kA (10/350μs).
��Ability of quenching of follow current up to 50 kA.
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution boards
and switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Design: multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable
modules. The modules can be removed in case
of measurement or failure without necessity of device
disconnection.
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester
is non-functional and the replaceable module must be
replaced).
��The modules can be turned in their base by 180°, so
that it is also possible to turn the whole device while
keeping legibility of description (e.g. at connection
from the top).
��Lightning current arresters SJB-25E-... partly replace
the type 1, which are shown in the cataloguey Minia
(N1-2008-C ). The replacements are shown in details
in the conversion table at the end of the chapter.
Network Type Product Number Weight Packagecode of modules [kg] [pcs]
TN-C (3L + PEN) SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 6 0.91 1TN-S (3L + N + PE ) SJB-25E-3N-MZS 38358 8 1.31 1
Accessories
Terminal extensions AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57
Minia
D4
Overvoltage protections
LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1Lightning current arresters SJBplus-50-2,5
��Lightning current arrester for demanding applications,
industry, power engineering etc.
��For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SJBplus-50-2.5,
and for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use the combinati-
on 3 pcs SJBplus-50-2.5 + 1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5.
��Main component is a powerful arrester gap with
electronic ignition release able to arrest lightning
current up to 50 kA (10/350 μs).
��Ability of quenching of follow current up to 50 kA.
��It is necessary to consider deionization space shown
on page D7.
Accessories
Interconnecting busbars G1L-1000-16-L page E52
Terminal extensions AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57
Summing spark gap SJB-NPE-1,5
��Lightning current arrester intended especially for
connection 3+1 or 1+1.
��Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S
or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1“).
��Main component is a powerful arrester gap with
electronic ignition release able to arrest lightning
current up to 100 kA (10/350 μs).
��Ability of quenching of follow short-circuit current
up to 100 A without the ionized gas.
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution boards
and switchboard cabinets Distri.
Connection Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
L-PEN, L-PE, L-N SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 2 0.567 1
Connection Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
N-PE SJB-NPE-1,5 34716 2 0.32 1
Minia
D5
Overvoltage protections
LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1
Specifi cations
Type SJB-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS SJBplus-50-2.5 SJB-NPE-1.5
Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11
IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1
VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6
Approval marks
Rated voltage UN
230 V/400 V a.c. 230 V/400 V a.c. 400 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Maximum constant operating voltage UC
350 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 260 V a.c.
Lightning current (10/350 μs) Iimp
peak value Ipeakl 75 kA (25 kA / pole) 100 kA (25 kA / pole) 50 kA 100 kA
charge Q 37.5 As 50 As 25 As 50 As
specific energy W/R 1.4 MJ/Ω 2.5 MJ/Ω 0.625 MJ/Ω 2.5 MJ/Ω
Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) In
L-N - 25 kA 50 kA -
N-PE - 100 kA - 100 kA
L-PEN 25 kA - 50 kA -
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Voltage protection level Up
L-N - ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 2.5 kV -
N-PE - ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV
L-PEN ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 2.5 kV -
Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 1 type 1 type 1 type 1
according to IEC 61643-1 class I class I class I class I
according to VDE 0675-6 class B class B class B class B
Response time L-N - ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns -
N-PE - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns
L-PEN ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns -
Quenching follow-current Ifi
L-N - 50 kA / 264 V a.c. 50 kA / 400 V a.c. -
N-PE - 0.1 kA - 0.1 kA
L-PEN 50 kA / 264 V a.c. - 50 kA / 400 V a.c. -
Max. backup fuse gG / gL 315 A 315 A 500 A -
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 10 ÷ 50 mm2 10 ÷ 50 mm2
Conductor flexible 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 16 ÷ 35 mm2 16 ÷ 35 mm2
Torque 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 8 Nm 8 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes yes yes
Optical signalling
Functional state green colour green colour - -
Non-functional state red colour red colour - -
Remote signalling
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 001 - -
Max. voltage / current Umax
/ Imax
250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A - -
125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A - -
Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 - -
Torque 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm - -
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Minia
D6
Overvoltage protections
LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1Dimensions
43.55.5
64
45 90
142.8
SJB-25E-3N-MZS
107.1
SJB-25E-3-MZS~8
~7
12
11
14
12
11
14
35
45 90
58
5.5 43.5
SJB-NPE-1.5
35 5.5 43.5
72.5
45 151
SJBplus-50-2.5
Minia
D7
Overvoltage protections
LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1
Diagram
By the action of arrester there happens to the ionized gas
from the back side of the arrester. Deionization space is
defi ned in fi g. 1). In the deionization space there must
not be any highly and medium combustible material (fi re
reaction class C, D, E or F according to EN 13501-1 +A1) or
live bare conductive parts. Minimum distance from ma-
terials combustible with diffi culty or non-combustible
materials (fi re reaction class A1, A2, B) is shown in fi g. 2).
55 mm 55 mm
55 mm55 mm
100 mm
120°
7.5 mm
55 m
m55
mm
1) 2)
N ( )
(N)
SJB-NPE-1,5
L/N ( )
(L/N)
SJBplus-50-2,5
Deionization spaces SJBplus-50-2,5
N
L1 L2 L3
SJB-25E-3N-MZS
L1 L2 L3
SJB-25E-3-MZS
1112 14 1112 14
Minia
D8
Overvoltage protections
COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 +
��For protection of electric networks and equipment against
overvoltage from direct or indirect lightning strokes
in the arresting equipment of buildings, LV lines etc.
��For protection against overvoltage caused by atmo-
spheric disturbances and from switching processes
in networks.
��For protection of common wiring in apartments,
houses, commercial buildings etc.
��It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave
power caused by direct or indirect lightning stroke
and or switching processes in the networks.
��Use: as the fi rst stage (coarse protection) and the second
stage (medium protection) in three degree scale of
protection against overvoltage – type 1 and type 2
according to EN 61643-11.
��For further information on OEZ off er of overvoltage pro-
tection see „Overvoltage protections – Application
manual”.
��Lightning current and surge voltage arresters designed
for building, residential, commercial and other similar
installations classed in group „big installation threat“.
��For four-wire TN-C network, use SJBC-25E-3-MZS, and for
fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use SJBC-25E-3N-MZS.
��Main components are an enclosed spark gap with
electronic ignition release (T1) able to arrest lightning
current up to 25 kA (10/350 μs) and a parallel varistor
(T2) with quicker reaction time (25 ns).
��Ability of quenching of follow short-circuit current
up to 25 kA without the ionized gas.
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution boards
and switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Design: multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable
modules. The modules can be removed in case
of measurement or failure without necessity of device
disconnection.
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester
is non-functional and the replaceable module must be
replaced).
��The modules can be turned in their base by 180°, so
that it is also possible to turn the whole device while
keeping legibility of description (e.g. at connection
from the top).
��Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SJBC-25E-...
replace the connection of overvoltage protections
of the 1st and 2nd type installed in series next to each
other, shown in the catalogue Modular devices Minia
(N1-2008-A). The replacements are shown in details
in the conversion table at the end of the chapter.
Network Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
TN-C (3L + PEN) SJBC-25E-3-MZS 38361 6 1.04 1
TN-S (3L + N + PE) SJBC-25E-3N-MZS 38362 8 1.43 1
Accessories
Terminal extensions AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57
Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SJBC-25E-...
Minia
D9
Overvoltage protections
��Lightning current arresters designed for building,
residential, commercial and other similar installations
classed in group „medium installation threat“.
��For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SVBC-12.5-1(-S), and
for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use 3 pcs SVBC-12.5-1(-S)
+ 1 pc SVBC-50-N.
��Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning
current up to 12,5 kA (10/350 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the lightning current
arrester is non-functional and it must be replaced).
��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-S.
��Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SVBC-...
can be used instead of connection of overvoltage
protections of the 1st and 2nd type installed in series
next to each other, shown in the catalogue Modular
devices Minia (N1-2008-A). The replacements are
shown in details in the conversion table at the end
of the chapter.
��Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers
LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.
Summing spark gap SVBC-50-N
��Lightning current and surge voltage arrester designed
especially for connection 3+1 or 1+1.
��Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S
or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1”).
��Main component is an enclosed spark gap able to arrest
lightning current up to 50 kA (10/350 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 +
Connection Design Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
L-PEN, L-PE, L-N without remote signalling SVBC-12,5-1 39027 1 0.15 1
L-PEN, L-PE, L-N with remote signalling SVBC-12,5-1-S 38945 1 0.16 1
Connection Design Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
N-PE without remote signalling SVBC-50-N 39004 1 0.11 1
Accessories
Interconnecting busbars G1L-50-16-L, G1L-65-16-L, G1L-1000-16-L, S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. page E52
Terminal extensions AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57
Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SVBC-12,5...
Minia
D10
Overvoltage protections
COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 +
Specifi cations
Type SJBC-25E-3-MZS SJBC-25E-3N-MZSSVBC-12,5-1 SVBC-12,5-1-S
SVBC-50-N
Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11
IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1
VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6
Approval marks
Rated voltage UN
230 V/400 V a.c. 230 V/400 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Maximum constant operating voltage UC
350 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 275 V a.c. 255 V a.c.
Lightning current (10/350 μs) Iimp
peak value Ipeakl 75 kA (25 kA / pole) 100 kA (25 kA / pole) 12.5 kA 50 kA
charge Q 37.5 As 50 As 6.25 As 25 As
specific energy W/R 1.4 MJ/Ω 2.5 MJ/Ω 39 kJ/Ω 625 kJ/Ω
Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) In
L-N - 25 kA 20 kA -
N-PE - 100 kA - 50 kA
L-PEN 25 kA - 20 kA -
Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Imax
L-N - 40 kA 50 kA -
N-PE - - - 100 kA
L-PEN 40 kA - 50 kA -
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Voltage protection level Up
L-N - ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV -N-PE - ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV
L-PEN ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV -Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 1 and type 2 + type 1 and type 2 + type 1 and type 2 + type 1 and type 2 +
according to IEC 61643-1 class I and class II class I and class II class I and class II class I and class II
according to VDE 0675-6 class B and class C class B and class C class B and class C class B and class C
Response time L-N - ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns -N-PE - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns
L-PEN ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns -Quenching follow-current I
fi L-N - 25 kA / 264 V a.c. - -
N-PE - 0.1 kA - 0.1 kA
L-PEN 25 kA / 264 V a.c. - - -
Max. backup fuse gG / gL 315 A 315 A 160 A gL -
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2
Conductor flexible 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2
Torque 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 3.5 Nm 3.5 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes yes yes
Optical signalling
Functional state green colour green colour green colour -
Non-functional state red red red -
Remote signalling
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 001 001 -
Max. voltage / current Umax
/ Imax
250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 0.5 A -
125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A -
Min. switched power 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) -
Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 -
Torque 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm -
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Minia
D11
Overvoltage protections
COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 +
Dimensions
43.55.5
64
45 90
142.8
SJBC-25E-3N-MZS
107.1
SJBC-25E-3-MZS~8
~7
12
11
14
12
11
14
Diagram
SJBC-25E-3-MZS
L3L2L1
N
SJBC-25E-3N-MZS
L3L2L1
1112 141112 14
SVBC-...
17.5
~99
.5
~11
~9
69
44
9045
14
11
12
7
L/N ( )
(L/N)
12 11 14 N ( )
( )N
L/N ( )
(L/N)
SVBC-12,5-1-S SVBC-12,5-1 SVBC-50-N
Minia
D12
Overvoltage protections
��For protection of electric networks and equipment
against overvoltage from indirect lightning strokes.
��For protection against overvoltage caused by atmospheric
disturbances and from switching processes in networks.
��For protection of common wiring in apartments,
commercial buildings etc.
��It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave
power caused by indirect lightning stroke and or
switching processes in the networks.
��Use:
- as the second stage (medium protection) in 3-stage over-
voltage protection - type 2 according to EN 61643-11
Surge voltage arresters SVC in fi xed design
��Surge voltage arresters designed for building,
residential, commercial and similar installations
classed in group „low installation threat“.
��For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SVC-275-1(-S), and
for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use the combination
3 pcs SVC-275-1(-S) + 1 pc SVC-255-N-S.
��Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning
current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester
is non-functional and it must be replaced).
��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-S
��Surge voltage arresters SVC-275-... replace the designs
of overvoltage protections of the 2nd type SVL-275...,
shown in the catalogue Modular devices Minia
(N1- 2008-C).The replacements are shown in details
in the conversion table at the end of the chapter.
��Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers
LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.
Connection Design Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
L-PEN, L-PE, L-N without remote signalling SVC-275-1 38842 1 0.095 1with remote signalling SVC-275-1-S 38843 1 0.100 1
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2
Connection Design Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
N-PE with remote signalling SVC-255-N-S 38844 1 0.100 1
Summing spark gap SVC-255-N-S
��Surge voltage arrester designed especially for
connection 3+1 or 1+1.
��Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S
or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1”).
��Main component is a power arrester, able to arrest
lightning current up to 50 kA (8/20 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester
is non-functional and it must be replaced).
��Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers
LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.
��Surge voltage arresters designed for building,
residential, commercial and similar installations
classed in group „low installation threat“.
��For four-wire TN-C network, use SVC-350-3-MZ(S), and
for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use SVC-350-3N-MZ(S).
��Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning
current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Design two-part device consisting of a base and
replaceable module with a varistor. In case of a failure
it is suffi cient to replace the module by a new one
without the need of turning the device off .
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is
non-functional and the replaceable module must be
replaced).
��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-MZS.
��Surge voltage arresters SVC-350-... replace the designs
of overvoltage protections SVL-275..., shown in the
catalogue Modular devices Minia (N1-2008-C ). The
replacements are shown in details in the conversion
table at the end of the chapter.
��Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers
LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.
Surge voltage arresters SVC with a replaceable module (multipole)
Network Design Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
TN-C without remote signalling SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 3 0.393 1(3L + PEN) with remote signalling SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 3 0.403 1TN-S without remote signalling SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 4 0.433 1(3L + N+ PE ) with remote signalling SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 4 0.443 1
Minia
D13
Overvoltage protections
Accessories
Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. page E52
Terminal extensions AS-..., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2Overvoltage protections SVM with removable module
��Surge voltage arresters for demanding applications,
industry, power engineering etc.
��Use mainly in combination with SJBplus-50-2.5, if the
length of the line between T1 and T2 is shorter than 5 m.
��Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning
current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Design two-part device consisting of a base and
replaceable module with a varistor. In case of a failure
it is suffi cient to replace the module by a new one
without the need of turning the device off .
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the lightning current
arrester is non-functional and the replaceable module
must be replaced).
��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-ZS.
��Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers
LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.
Connection Design Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
L-PEN, L-PE, L-N without remote signalling SVM-440-Z 34720 1 0.136 1with remote signalling SVM-440-ZS 34721 1 0.143 1
Connection Design Type Product Number Weight Package
between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
N-PE without remote signalling SVM-NPE-Z 34723 1 0.130 1
Summing spark gap SVM-NPE-Z
��Surge voltage arrester designed especially for
connection 3+1 or 1+1.
��Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S
or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1“).
��Main component is a power arrester, able to arrest
lightning current up to 40 kA (8/20 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Visual signalling of the shut-down device state (after
disconnection the lightning current arrester is non-
functional and the replaceable module must be
replaced).
��Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers
LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.
Minia
D14
Overvoltage protections
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2
TypeSVC-275-1SVC-275-1-S SVC-255-N-S SVC-350-3-MZ
SVC-350-3-MZSSVC-350-3N-MZSVC-350-3N-MZS
SVM-440-ZSVM-440-ZS SVM-NPE-Z
Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11
IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1
VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6
Approval marks
Rated voltage UN
230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V /400 V a.c. 230 V /400 V a.c. 400 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Maximum constant operating voltage UC
275 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 350 V a.c. (L-N) 440 V a.c. 260 V a.c.
350 V d.c. - - 264 V a.c. (N-PE) 585 V d.c. -
Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) In
L-N 20 kA - 20 kA / pole 20 kA / pole 20 kA -
N-PE - 30 kA - 20 kA - 20 kA
L-PEN 20 kA - 20 kA / pole - 20 kA -
Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Imax
L-N 40 kA - 40 kA / pole 40 kA / pole 40 kA -
N-PE - 50 kA - 40 kA - 40 kA
L-PEN 40 kA - 40 kA / pole - 40 kA -
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Voltage protection level Up
L-N ≤ 1.35 kV - ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 2.2 kV -
N-PE - ≤ 1.3 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1 kV
L-PEN ≤ 1.35 kV - ≤ 1.4 kV - ≤ 2.2 kV -
Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 2 type 2 type 2 type 2 type 2 type 2
according to IEC 61643-1 class II class II class II class II class II class II
according to VDE 0675-6 class C class C class C class C class C class C
Response time L-N ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns -
N-PE - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns
L-PEN ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns -
Max. backup fuse gG / gL 125 A - 125 A 125 A 125 A -
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2
Conductor flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2
Torque 2 Nm 2 Nm 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes only bottom only bottom yes yes
Optical signalling
Functional state green colour green colour transparent colour transparent colour transparent colour transparent colour
Non-functional state red red red red red red
Remote signalling
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 001 001 001 001 -
Max. voltage / current Umax
/ Imax
250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A -
125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A -
Min. switched power 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V / 10 mA) -
Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 -
Torque 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm -
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Specifi cations
Minia
D15
Overvoltage protections
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2
Dimensions
12
11
14
17.5 44
62
~4.5
45 86
~5.5
~7
~95
SVC-275-...
SVC-255-...
Diagram
SVM-440-ZSSVC-255-N-S
N ( )
( )N
1112 14
SVC-275-1-SSVC-275-1 SVM-440-Z
SVC-350-3N-MZ
L1 L2 L3 N
SVC-350-3N-MZS
1112 14
L1 L2 L3 N
SVC-350-3-MZ
L1 L2 L3
SVC-350-3-MZS
1112 14
L1 L2 L3
L/N ( ) 1112 14
(L/ )N
L/N ( ) 1112 14
(L/ )N
L/N ( )
(L/ )N
L/N ( )
(L/ )N
SVM-NPE-Z
N ( )
( )N
9
5.5 43.5
64
45 90
52.5
14
11
12
70
14
11
12
SVC-350-3-MZSVC-350-3-MZS
SVC-350-3N-MZSVC-350-3N-MZS
17.5
~97
12
11
14
9045
58
5.5
~8
43.5
~7
SVM-...
Minia
D16
Overvoltage protections
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3��For protection of electric networks and equipment
against overvoltage from indirect lightning strokes.
��For protection against overvoltage caused by atmo-
spheric disturbances and from switching processes
in networks.
��For protection of common wiring in apartments,
houses, commercial buildings etc.
��It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave
power caused by indirect lightning stroke and or
switching processes in the networks.
��Use: as the third stage (fi ne protection) in 3-stage overvol-
tage protection – type 3 according to EN 61643-11.
��For further information on OEZ off er of overvoltage pro-
tection see „Overvoltage protections – Application
manual”.
Surge voltage arresters SVD
��Surge voltage arresters designed for protection
of overvoltage sensitive devices.
��Use mainly in networks TN-S, TT. If used in TN-C network
it is necessary to connect terminals N and PE.
��SVD-253-1N-MZS is intended for single-phase distribu-
tion systems and SVD-335-3N-MZS for three-phase
distribution systems.
��Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning
current in 2-pole design up to 10 kA (8/20 μs) and
in 4-pole design up to 4.5 kA (8/20 μs).
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Design two-part device consisting of a base and
replaceable module with a varistor. In case of a failure
it is suffi cient to replace the module by a new one
without the need of turning the device off .
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is
non-functional and the replaceable module must be
replaced).
��Surge voltage arrester SVD-253-1N-MZS replaces the
„black“ SVD-250M-ZS shown in the catalogue Modular
devices MINIA (N1-2008-A). The replacements are
shown in details in the conversion table at the end
of the chapter.
Design Type Product Number Weight Package
for network code of modules [kg] [pcs]
single-phase SVD-253-1N-MZS 38371 1 0.081 1three-phase SVD-335-3N-MZS 38372 2 0.129 1
Minia
D17
Overvoltage protections
Type SVD-253-1N-MZS SVD-335-3N-MZS
Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11
IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1
VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6
Approval marks
Rated voltage UN
230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c.
Maximum constant operating voltage UC
L-N 253 V a.c. 335 V a.c.
N-PE - 255 V a.c.
Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) In
L-N 3 kA 1.5 kA / pole
L-PE 3 kA 1.5 kA
N-PE - 1.5 kA
Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Imax
L-N 10 kA 4.5 kA
L-PE 10 kA 4.5 kA
N-PE 10 kA 10 kA
Rated loading current at 30 °C IL
26 A 26 A
Off -load voltage Uoc 6 kV 4 kV
Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Voltage protection level Up
L-N ≤ 1.1 kV ≤ 1.2 kV
L-PE ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV
N-PE ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV
Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 3 type 3
according to IEC 61643-1 class III class III
according to VDE 0675-6 class D class D
Response time L-N ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns
L-PE ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns
Max. backup circuit breaker (C) or fuse gG / gL 25 A 25 A
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35
Optical signalling
Functional state transparent colour transparent colour
Non-functional state red red
Remote signalling
Arrangement of contacts 1) 01 01
Max. voltage / current Umax
/ Imax
250 V a.c. / 3 A 250 V a.c. / 3 A
50 V d.c. / 3 A 50 V d.c. / 3 A
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.2 ÷ 4 mm2 0.2 ÷ 4 mm2
Conductor flexible 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
Top or bottom connection only bottom only bottom
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 85 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3
Specifi cations
Minia
D18
Overvoltage protections
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3Dimensions
45 90
58
7 4417.7
2
4
N
1 N
6 L
5 L
12
11
3
35.4
6
4
L1
2N
11
12
10 L3
8 L2
9 L3
7 L21N
5L1
3
SVD-253-1N-MZS SVD-335-3N-MZS
Diagram
SVD-253-1N-MZS
5 / L
1 / N
3 /
6 / L
2 / N
11
12
4 /
IN OUT 5 / L1
7 / L2
9 / L3
1 / N
3 /
6 / L1
8 / L2
10 / L3
2 / N
11
12
4 /
IN OUT
SVD-335-3N-MZS
Minia
D19
Overvoltage protections
��Surge voltage arresters intended for building,
residential, commercial and similar installations,
part of which are DC applications (e.g. photovoltaic
source).
��For applications with maximum operating voltage up to
1000 V type SVF-1000-2VB-MZ(S) is used, for appli-
cations with maximum operating voltage up to 600 V
type SVF-600-3V-MZ(S) is used.
��Type SVF-1000-2VB-MZ(S) provides galvanical insula-
tion from the ground. It is therefore convenient for
insulated systems.
��Main components are varistors connected in “Y”. In type
1000 V there is lightning arrester on the place of
varistor between the common bus and ground that
limits the arrested current.
��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and
switchboard cabinets Distri.
��Design multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable
modules. The modules can be removed in case
of measurement or failure without necessity of device
disconnection.
��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device
state (after disconnection the lightning current
arrester is non-functional and the replaceable
module must be replaced).
��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-MZS.
Surge voltage arresters SVF
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS��For protection of electric networks and equipment
against overvoltage from indirect lightning strokes.
��For protection against overvoltage caused by atmo-
spheric disturbances and from switching processes
in networks.
��For protection of parts of photovoltaic sources mainly
on their DC side.
��It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave
power caused by indirect lightning stroke and or
switching processes in the networks.
��Use:
- as the second stage (medium protection) against
overvoltage – type 2 according to EN 61643-11.
��For further information on OEZ off er for photovoltaic
systems see catalogue „Protective and switching
devices of photovoltaic sources””.
Uoc max
Design Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
1000 V d.c. without remote signalling SVF-1000-2VB-MZ 39165 3 0.344 1
1000 V d.c. with remote signalling SVF-1000-2VB-MZS 39527 3 0.347 1
600 V d.c. without remote signalling SVF-600-3V-MZ 39528 3 0.322 1
600 V d.c. with remote signalling SVF-600-3V-MZS 39529 3 0.325 1
Accessories
Terminal extensions AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57
Minia
D20
Overvoltage protections
SVF-600-3V-MZ SVF-600-3V-MZS
L+ L-
L+ L-
1112 14
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ
L+ L-
SVF-1000-2VB-MZS
L+ L-
1112 14
TypeSVF-1000-2VB-MZSVF-1000-2VB-MZS
SVF-600-3V-MZSVF-600-3V-MZS
Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1IEC 60364-7-712 IEC 60364-7-712
Approval marks
Max. off -load voltage Uoc max 1000 V d.c. 600 V d.c.
Max. short-circuit current Isc max 80 A without limits
Maximum constant operating voltage UC
1000 V d.c. 600 V d.c.
Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) In 15 kA 15 kA
Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Imax 30 kA 40 kA
Voltage protection level Up
In 15 kA L+, L- ≤ 5 kV ≤ 3 kV
(L+/L-), PE ≤ 3 kV ≤ 3 kV
In 10 kA L+, L- ≤ 4.5 kV -
(L+/L-), PE ≤ 2.5 kV -
In 5 kA L+, L- ≤ 4 kV ≤ 2.5 kV
(L+/L-), PE ≤ 2 kV ≤ 2.5 kV
Earth-leakage current at Uc
IPE L+, PE / L-, PE < 1 μA < 20 μA
Still stand power input Pc < 1 mW < 12 mW
Voltage protection levels of the individual modules Up In 15 kA varistor / arrester ≤ 2.5 kV / ≤ 3 kV ≤ 3 kV / -
Response time ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns
Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 2 type 2
according to IEC 61643-1 class II class II
according to VDE 0675-6 class C class C
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35
Connection
Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 1.5 ÷ 35 mm2 1.5 ÷ 35 mm2
Conductor flexible 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2
Torque 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm
Top or bottom connection - -
Optical signalling
Functional state transparent colour transparent colour
Non-functional state red colour red colour
Remote signalling
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 001
Max. voltage / current Umax
/ Imax
250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A
125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A
Min. switched power 0.12 VA (12 V, 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V, 10 mA)
Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2
Torque 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS
Dimensions Diagram
5.5 43.5
64
45 90
52.5
SVF-...
14
11
12
Specifi cations
Minia
D21
Overvoltage protections
REPLACEABLE MODULES
Newly produced Connection Spare module Product Number Weight Package
devices between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
T1
SJB-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SJB-25E-1-M 38360 2.00 0.2400 10
SJB-25E-3N-MZS L-N SJB-25E-1-M 38360 2.00 0.2400 10
SJB-25E-3N-MZS N-PE SJB-100E-N-M 38359 2.00 0.2400 10
T1 + T2
SJBC-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SJB-N25E-1-M 38363 1.33 0.1290 10
SJBC-25E-3N-MZS L-N SJB-N25E-1-M 38363 1.33 0.1290 10
SJBC-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SVC-N350-1-M 38364 0.66 0.0520 10
SJBC-25E-3N-MZS L-N SVC-N350-1-M 38364 0.66 0.0520 10
SJB-25E-3N-MZS N-PE SJB-100E-N-M 38359 2.00 0.2400 10
T2
SVC-350-3-MZ(S) L-PEN SVC-350-1-M 38369 1.00 0.0510 10
SVC-350-3N-MZ(S) L-N SVC-350-1-M 38369 1.00 0.0510 10
SVC-350-3N-MZ(S) N-PE SVC-264-N-M 38370 1.00 0.0400 10
T2SVM-440-ZS L-PEN; L-N SVM-440 34722 1.00 0.0490 10
SVM-NPE-Z N-PE SVM-NPE 34724 1.00 0.0390 10
T3SVD-253-1N-MZS L-N; N-PE SVD-253-1N-M 38373 1.00 0.0270 10
SVD-335-3N-MZS L-N; N-PE SVD-335-3N-M 38374 2.00 0.0430 10
T2 - FV
SVF-600-3V-MZ(S) X-L+;X-L-;X-PE SVF-600-V-M 39530 1.00 0.0717 20
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ X-L+; X-L- SVF-1000-V-M 39166 1.00 0.0826 20
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ X-PE SVF-1000-B-M 39167 1.00 0.0454 20
Replacement of module
X = common connection bus Y at SVF-1000-..
Formerly produced Connection Spare module Product Number Weight Package
devices between code of modules [kg] [pcs]
T2
SVM275-Z(S) L-PEN; L-N SVM275 13003 1.00 0.045 1
SVM440-Z(S) L-PEN; L-N SVM440 18564 1.00 0.060 1
SVM260/NPE-Z N-PE SVM260/NPE 14427 1.00 0.045 1
T3 SVD250M-ZS L-N; N-PE SVD250M 13021 1.00 0.022 1
Minia
D22
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONSConversion tables of former and new designs
Formerly produced devices Newly produced devicesNote
Type designation ID Type designation ID
Type 1
SJBplus-50-1,5 34715 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 adequate design
SJBplus50/1,5 14423 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 adequate design
SJBplus-50 34714 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 innovation - electronic ignition spark gap
SJBplus50 14424 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 innovation - electronic ignition spark gap
SJBpro-35-1,5 34713SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SJB-25E-3N-MZS 38358 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SJBpro35/1,5 14422SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SJB-25E-3N-MZS 38358 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SJBpro-35 34712SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SJB-25E-3N-MZS 38358 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SJBpro35 13019SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SJB-25E-3N-MZS 38358 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SJB100/NPE/1,5 14425 SJB-NPE-1,5 34716 adequate design
Type 2
SVM440-Z 18565 SVM-440-Z 34720 adequate design
SVM440-ZS 18566 SVM-440-ZS 34721 adequate design
SVM-275-Z 34717SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SVM275-Z 13004SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SVM-275-ZS 34718SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SVM275-ZS 13005 SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)
SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)
SVM260/NPE-Z 14426 SVM-NPE-Z 34723 adequate design
SVL-275 37405 SVC-275-1 38842 adequate design
SVL275 07439 SVC-275-1 38842 adequate design
SVL-275-S 37406 SVC-275-1-S 38843 adequate design
SVL275S 07440 SVC-275-1-S 38843 adequate design
SJL275 07441 SVC-275-1 38842 higher In, higher I
max
SJL275S 07442 SVC-275-1-S 38843 higher In, higher I
max
SVL-NPE-S 37410 SVC-255-N-S 38844 adequate design
Type 3SVD-250M-ZS 34725 SVD-253-1N-MZS 38371 adequate design
SVD250M-ZS 13020 SVD-253-1N-MZS 38371 adequate design
Table of tolerance zones at 1 mA
Type designation Product Voltage tolerance zone Type designation Product Voltage tolerance zone
code at 1 mA (formerly produced devices) code at 1 mA
SVBC-12,5-1 39027 459 - 561 V SVL-275 37405 459 - 561 V
SVBC-12,5-1-S 38945 459 - 561 V SVL-275-S 37406 459 - 561 V
SVC-275-1 38842 459 - 561 V SVM-275-Z 34717 387 - 473 V
SVC-275-1-S 38843 459 - 561 V SVM-275-ZS 34718 387 - 473 V
SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 509 - 621 V SVM-275 34719 387 - 473 V
SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 509 - 621 V SVL275 07439 459 - 561 V
SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 509 - 621 V SVL275S 07440 459 - 561 V
SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 509 - 621 V SVM275-Z 13004 387 - 473 V
SVC-350-1-M 38369 509 - 621 V SVM275-ZS 13005 387 - 473 V
SVM-440-Z 34720 644 - 786 V SVM275 13003 387 - 473 V
SVM-440-ZS 34721 644 - 786 V SVM440-Z 18565 644 - 786 V
SVM-440 34722 644 - 786 V SVM440-ZS 18566 644 - 786 V
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ 39165 960 - 1056 V SVM440 18564 644 - 786 V
SVF-1000-2VB-MZS 39527 960 - 1056 V
SVF-600-3V-MZ 39528 558 - 682 V
SVF-600-3V-MZS 39529 558 - 682 V
SVF-1000-V-M 39166 960 - 1056 VSVF-600-V-M 39530 558 - 682 V
��Varistor is able to provide protection against overvol-
tage repeatedly. However, every such actuating chan-
ges its structure to certain extent. We can detect by
timely varistor check whether is this change of structu-
re and resulting varistor function already beyond the
acceptable limit or not.
��Standard EN 62 305-4 requires besides others also
periodic overvoltage protections checks. This check is
usually completed with varistor measurement.
��On principle, the check of overvoltage protections is carried
out by connecting to the DC voltage, while increasing the
voltage to the point when current 1 mA fl ows through the
arrester. Subsequently the voltage level is deducted. This is
carried out repeatedly also for the opposite polarity.
��If the deducted voltage level is in between the Voltage
tolerance zone given in the table, the overvoltage pro-
tection is functional. In the opposite case it is necessary
to replace the overvoltage protection or its module. The
table of Voltage tolerance zones is given below.
Varistor function test
Minia
D23
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
Fig. 1. Overvoltage categories and impulse withstand voltage Uimp
(1.2/50 μs) for
individual parts of a building and for rated voltage 230/400 V a.c. – according to
EN 60664-1 equivalent IEC 664-1
lift
flats
appliances
1,5 kV1,5 kV
6 kV6 kV4 kV4 kV 2,5 kV2,5 kV
U(1
.2/5
0 μs
)im
p
Overvoltage category IV
Outside lead
Overvoltage category IIIFixed wiring
Overvoltagecategory II
Overvoltagecategory I
Appliances Light-current appliance
100 200 300350
t [μs]
20
15
7.5
25
50I,I
[kA]
imp
n
400
50 kA (10/350 s)μ
15 kA (8/20 μs)
Fig. 2. Wave form and energy 8/20 μs and 10/350 μs (the arrested energy corresponds
to the area below the curve)
General
��Protection of buildings and electrical equipment against
lightning eff ects and overvoltage is carried out both out-
side and inside the building. Еxternal protection devices
include lightning traps, conductor arresters, earthing sys-
tems, discharge arresters etc. internal protection measu-
res include equipotential bonding, screening etc.
��The basis of internal protection against lightning eff ects
and overvoltage is protective equipotential bonding,
i.e. connection of all metallic wiring to an equipoten-
tial EP busbar (EP – equipotential point). This elimina-
tes potential diff erences in the wiring over a permissi-
ble limit with subsequent damaging discharge.
��Lightning current arresters and surge voltage arresters are
the elements of internal protection. They connect power
cables to the EP busbar indirectly through arrester gaps
and varistors and thus reduce overvoltage. The overvol-
tage reduction is normally carried out in 3 stages, while
each stage has to reduce overvoltage. The degree of re-
duction is defi ned by overvoltage categories according to
EN 60664-1. The arrester stages 1 to 3 are installed on the
interface of individual overvoltage categories – see Fig. 1.
��Stage 1 – coarse protection – type 1
This protection is provided by lightning current arresters SJB,
which arrest the biggest part of the overvoltage wave, and
are able to divert lightning currents or their substantial parts
without damage. It is possible to deduct from EN 62305-4
that in the most adverse case with 2-wire power lead the li-
ghtning current arresters must arrest up to 50 kA per pole. In
case of 4-wire power lead it is 25 kA per pole of impulse current
with the waveform 10/350 μs. They can achieve these parame-
ters, because they are designed on the spark gap basis.
��1st + 2nd stage – compact combined arrester
– type 1 + type 2 +
SJBC devices are compact combined arresters of type 1 and
type 2. They provide advantages of rough and medium
protection stages described in the previous and subsequent
paragraphs in one device. The fi rst and second stages are based
on the arrester gap and varistor respectively. Their installation
in one base is possible thanks to the technology of electronic
ignition release.This solution will be used in case of placement
of the 1st and 2nd protection stages in one switchboard.
Also SVBC is part of this group. It is also combined arrester
type 1 and 2. However, both stages are varistor based. On the
contrary to SJBC the type SVBC can arrest lightning current
only half of the value. For most applications this „lower out-
put“ is suffi cient.
��Stage 2 – medium protection – type 2
This protection is provided by varistor-based surge voltage arresters
SVC and SVM, which are able to divert atmospheric surges or
overvoltage from switching processes in the network with wave
form 8/20 μs without damage. In most cases they are installed
after the lightning current arresters, which reduce overvoltage
and „cut off “ the energy of the overvoltage wave. In particular
applications it can be installed in the main switchboard even
without the back-up 1. protection stage. For more information on
the selection of optimal solution see table Selection of the number
of protection stages and types on the following page.
See Fig. 2 for comparison of the energies diverted by the
lightning current arrester 50 kA and surge voltage arrester
15 kA. Apparently, the value of pulse current is not suffi cient
to compare the output of overvoltage protections without the
information on test wave type.
Surge voltage arresters are rated for a specifi c heat output. If
there is high power or too frequent overvoltage in the network,
the heat output can be exceeded and the surge voltage arrester
is disconnected by its thermal disconnecting device. After dis-
connection the surge voltage arresters are non-functional and it
is necessary to replace them or their module. The disconnection
is indicated optically or also remotely.
The disconnection is indicated optically or remotely. At insu-
lation measurement it is necessary to disconnect the arresters
to get undistorted results.
��Stage 3 – fi ne protection – type 3
To ensure really reliable protection it is necessary to complement
the above stages 1 and 2 by the last stage – type 3 (SVD). The
basic elements of the fi ne protection are varistors and suppressor
diodes able to divert the overvoltage with wave form 8/20 μs. It
is recommended to install this protection directly at the protec-
ted appliance, without a long cable between the arrester and
the appliance. In case there is a long line between the last stage
and the appliance the voltage in the conductors could rise over
a permissible level (e.g. due to induction). We recommend to
install this stage of protection to the power outlets that feed the
overvoltage sensitive appliances (etc. electronics).
��Surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic system
The principle of devices protection in applications of photo-
voltaic sources (600/1000 V d.c.) is similar to the LV network
protection 230/400 V. It is mainly the reduction of energy of
overvoltage wave that is caused by lightning stroke or by
switching processes in the network. The overvoltage pro-
tection is usually installed at the solar panel. At the length
of the line between solar panels and inverter L > 10 m we
recommend to install the overvoltage protection also at the
inverter on the DC side.
Minia
D24
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
The design of overvoltage protection in a low-voltage distribution system is solved by the set of standards EN 62305. Firstly the zones of protection against lightning are determined, risk of damage, lightning protection level, values of lightning currents etc. Secondly the types of overvoltage protections are selected and their placing. The fi nal decision to undergo certain level of risk, however, is still in the hands of investors. In order to roughly determine what type of protection should be installed if any, you can follow this procedure.
It consists in two steps, in particular:1) Selection of the number of protection stages and types2) Selection of overvoltage protections
Note: recommended procedure can not cover all possible cases, it shows the basic logic to follow.
1) Selection of the number of protection stages and types – this is one of the main and the fi rst decisive criterion in designing overvoltage protection. In the table Selection
of the number of protection stages and types you should fi rst fi nd corresponding risk (high, medium or small) for the installation in the building, to be protected, and after it determine corresponding sensitivity (big, medium or small) of appliances which are installed in the building. The intersection gives the required information i.e. the number of stages and protection type. Note that the best and safest solution is installation of all three protection stages.
2) Selection of overvoltage protections
Selection of T1 and T2From the previous paragraph, the number of protection stages and types is known, and not it is necessary to determine specifi c products. If both T1 and T2 are selected for protection, use the table „Selection of overvoltage protections T1 and T2“ , which is divided by other important criteria, such as value of the quenching follow-current, network type etc. If protection T1 is not chosen, it is possible
to select protection T2 arbitrarily, depending on utilization properties of individual off ered types (SVC, SVM).
Selection of T3The arresters of the last stage are installed as close as possible to the end device. Should a long cable be installed between the last stage and the appliance, voltage could have rise over a permissible level (e.g. due to induction) in the conductors. It is not allowed to install T3 closer than 5 m from T2 due to coordination maintenance.
If the protected device is in the distance shorter than 10 m from the second stage, it is not necessary to install the third stage - the second stage will provide suffi cient protection.
The surge voltage arresters T3 must always be installed downstream of the surge voltage arrester T2. If the line continues farther, install another surge voltage arresters of stage 3 at least 10 m downstream of the previous T3.
Recommended procedure of design of overvoltage protection in low-voltage distribution system
Selection of the number of protection stages and types
INSTALLATION THREAT
BIG MEDIUM LOW
- buildings with external lightning protection (lightning
conductor), with grounded roof superstructure (aerial)
etc. classed in lightning protection level LPL I or LPL II
- buildings with external lightning protection (lightning
conductor), with grounded roof superstructure (aerial)
etc. classed in lightning protection level LPL III or LPL IV
- buildings without external lightning protection
(lightning conductor), without grounded roof
superstructure (aerial) etc.
or at the same time
- buildings with overhead cable lines - buildings with underground cable lines
or or
- Individual housing units, if there is not possible to
install common fi rst protection stage T1 in HDS or HR
- if there can be assumed such separation of light-
ning current into several branches that it will not
exceed 12.5 kA(10/350 us) per one conductor
- Individual housing units, if there is not possible to
install common fi rst protection stage T1 in house
main switchboard (HDS) or main switchboard (HR)
Big - PC, TV, Hi-Fi system etc. T1 (spark gap) + T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor) T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor) T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor)
Medium - washing machines,
refrigerators etc. T1 (spark gap) + T2 (varistor) T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor) T2 (varistor)
Small - motors, fans etc. T1 (spark gap) +T 2 (varistor) T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor) T2 (varistor)
Appl
ianc
e se
nsit
ivit
y to
ove
rvol
tage
Selection of overvoltage protections T1 and T2
Installation NetworkMAIN SWITCHBOARD
- as close as possible to the inlet of power lead into the buildingSUBDISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD
SUBDISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD
- as close as possible to the protected device
threat type Protection type Recommended arrester type Protection
type Recommended arrester type Protection type Recommended arrester type
Low
TN-C T1 fi rst protection stage is not necessary T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
TN-C-S T1 fi rst protection stage is not necessary T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
TN-S, TT T1 fi rst protection stage is not necessary T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
Medium
TN-CT1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 2)
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1 + T2 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 -
TN-C-ST1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1 + T2 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 -
TN-S, TTT1 SJB-25E-3N-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1 + T2 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 + 1 ks SVBC-50-N -
Big
TN-CT1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 2)
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1 + T2 SJBC-25E-3-MZS -
TN-C-ST1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1 + T2 SJBC-25E-3-MZS -
TN-S, TTT1 SJB-25E-3N-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1 + T2 SJBC-25E-3N-MZS -
Industrial
and special
applications1)
TN-CT1 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 T2 3 ks SVM-440-Z
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1+T2 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z -
TN-C-ST1 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 T2 3 ks SVM-440-Z + 1 ks SVM-NPE-Z
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1+T2 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z -
TN-S, TTT1 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 1 ks SJB-NPE-1,5 T2 3 ks SVM-440-Z + 1 ks SVM-NPE-Z
T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)
T1+T2 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z + SJB-NPE-1,5 -1) Higher requirements for overvoltage protection parameters (I
fi > 25 kA, two-conductor lead etc.)
2) SVC-350-... Can be used in immediate vicinity to SJB-25E-... When SVC-275-…is used, it is necessary to keep minimum mutual distance of lines 10 m.3) Type SVD-253-1N-MZS is intended for one-phase system, type SVD-335-3N-MZS for three-phase system.
Minia
D25
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
1. Installation of lightning current arresters – T1
Lightning current arresters, i.e. the arresters type 1, are installed mainly on the interface of zones LPZ0 / LPZ1. The main switchboard is usually placed on this interface. The devices are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35 (DIN rail). Installation of the lightning current arresters in metering switchboard shall be approved by relevant power distribu-tion companies. In not measured part, use the lightning current arresters SJBplus-... or SJB-25E-...
2. Installation of compact combined surge voltage arresters of type T1+T2
We recommend to install the compact combined arrester type 1 and 2 (SJBC = spark gap + varistor) in the main switchboard on „U“ rail type TH 35 in case it is possible to unite the bounda-ries of lightning protection levels LPZ0/LPZ1 and LPZ1/LPZ2. With its parameters and small dimensions, this combination is suitable for both industrial applications and applications in buildings, apartments etc.The advantage of combined arres-ters is that they provide complete solution for given system (etc. TN-C, TN-S) without the need of interconnecting busbars etc. - „one device = complete solution“.If it is not possible to unite the boundaries of lightning pro-tection levels LPZ0/LPZ1 and LPZ1/LPZ2 (etc. in block of fl ats - in the unmeasured part there can not be installed varistor based overvoltage protection, then type SJB-25E-... has to be used on the boundary of LPZ0/LPZ1 and type SVC-...on the boundary of LPZ1/LPZ2 Combined arrester of lightning current type 1 and type 2 (SVBC – varistor) can be used in switchboards of individual
fl ats in cases when it is not possible to install common fi rst protection stage (etc. block of fl ats, where there is not allo-wed to install in unmeasured part any type of overvoltage protection). Combined arrester of lightning current SVBC is thank to lightning current separation in several branches convenient protection for these applications. It is installed on „U“ rail type TH 35.
3. Installation of surge voltage arresters – T2Surge voltage arresters T2 are installed mainly on boundaries of LPZ1 / LPZ2, that means in subsidiary switchboard behind the arresters of lightning current installed in the main switchboard. They are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35. It is necessary to ensure coordination of individual protection stages at installation. For more information see paragraph “Coordination of overvoltage protection“.
4. Installation of surge voltage arresters – T3Surge voltage arresters T2 are installed on „U“ rail of type TH 35. If the length of the line between T2 and T3<5 m, it is not necessary to use T3 – the parameters of coordination T2 and T3 would not be fulfi lled. Protection is suffi ciently provided by the surge voltage arrester T2. If the line continues farther, install another surge voltage arresters of stage 3 at least 10 m downstream of the previous T3. Surge voltage arresters of stage 3 can be connected to the line both lengthwise, see Fig. 1 and cross-wise see Fig. 2. Cross-connection to the line is advantageous in particular if the current fl owing through the line is higher than the permitted rated load current I
L of the surge voltage
arrester T3.
5. Installation of surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic systems
Overvoltage protections SVF are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35 usually at the solar panel. At the length of the line be-tween solar panels and inverter L>10 m we recommend to install the overvoltage protection also at the inverter on the DC side.
1. Protection of lightning current arresters – T1
Protection can be implemented in two ways: �� protection only by fuses F1 in the service box, if F1
correspond to the values stated in the table of technical parameters of given type. However, if in such wiring there are leakages and follow short-circuit currents, though the SJB arresters are able to quench the follow short-circuit currents, F1 may blow with subsequent interruption of power supply in the building.�� use of fuses F2 in addition to F1 if the latter are too big
or if you do not want to interrupt the power supply. In such case selectivity must be ensured between F1 and F2 i.e. InF1
≥ 1,6xInF2 .With this ratio of rated currents, F2 will cut out sooner than F1, and the power supply of the building will not
be interrupted. However, the values InF2 may be low, and F2 will blow more frequently. For this reason it is recommended to equip the fuse F2 with a signalling device.
2. Protection of surge voltage arresters – T2The previous paragraph applies also to the protection of surge voltage arresters, however in Wiring diagram examples these fuses are designated F3.
3. Protection of surge voltage arresters – T3Surge voltage arresters SVD shall be protected by circuit breakers or fuses gG max. 25 A.
4. Protection of arresters for connection„3+1“Arresters for connection between N and PE conductors,
i.e. the arrester SJB-NPE-1.5 and the module between N and PE for the other versions are not protected separately. Because their protection is already provided by fuses F1, F2 or F3, see the wiring diagram examples.
5.Protection of arresters for photovoltaic systemsIt is not needed to protect the arrester for photovoltaic systems in any special way. However, in case of two varistors design and one spark gap the limit of maximum
short-circuit current has to be considered.
The correct function of multiple stage protection is conditioned by correct coordination of individual stages. At fi rst the most sensitive stage of protection reacts. Before it gets overloaded the superior stage has to react.
It is valid in case of T1 and T2 that if their mutual distance is bigger than 10 m (the length of conductors), the coordination is guaranteed by the physical features of the lines. It means that we can use any combination of fi rst and second protection stage (once we follow other installation instructions).
In case we need to install T2 closer to T1, it is necessary to use combination of overvoltage protection designed for this purpose:
It is necessary to observe the minimal distance 5 m for the coordination between the second end the third stages of the protection.
COORDINATION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION
INSTALLATION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
PROTECTION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
+
LNPE
F
LNPE
max
. 0.5
m
F
fi g. 1. Continuous connection
fi g. 2. Transversal connection
T1 T2
< 5 m 5 ÷ 10 > 10
SJBplus-50-2,5 SVM-440-.. SVC-350-.. arbitrary
SJB-25E-.. SVC-350-.. SVC-350-.. arbitrary
> 5 m
T2 T3
Minia
D26
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONSLow installation threat
TN-C
TN-C-S
TN-S, TT
STANDARD SOLUTION ECONOMICAL SOLUTION
F1L1L2L3PEN
SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)
L1L2L3NPE
F1L1L2L3PEN
L1L2L3PEN
3 pcs SVC-275-1(38842)
SCV -275 SC V-275 SCV -275
F1L1L2L3
PEN
L1L2L3
PEN
SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)
F1L1L2L3N
L1L2L3PEN
3 pcs SVC-275-1(38842)
PE
F1L1L2L3
PEN
3 pcs SVC-275-1(38842)
1 pc SVC-255-N-S(38844)
L1L2L3
PEN
F2 if F1>125 A F2 if F1>125 A
F2 if F1>125 A F2 if F1>125 A
F2 if F1>125 A F2 if F1>125 A
F1L1L2L3PEN
L1L2L3PEN
SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)
SCV -275 SCV -275 SCV -275
SCV -275 SCV -275 SCV -275 SC V-255
G1L-50-16-L(39789)
G1L-65-16-L(39790)
G1L-50-16-L(39789)
a) Family houses without lightning conductor and exposed conductive parts
��Conducted by underground cable line.
��Where there is no threat of direct lightning stroke to the nearby building with lightning conductor which is galvanically
connected to the protected building.
b) Individual housing units
�� It is possible to install common fi rst protection stage T1 in the main switchboard in the block of fl ats.
Minia
D27
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
F1L1L2L3
PEN
F2 if F1 > 160 A
F2 if F1 > 315 A
F2 if F1 > 315 A
F2 if F1 > 315 A
F2 if F1 > 160 A F3 if F1 > 125 A
F3 if F1 > 125 A
F3 if F1 > 125 AF2 if F1 > 160 A
F1L1L2L3N
L1L2L3PEN
3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1(39027)
PE
1 pc SVBC-50-N(39004)
F1L1L2L3PEN
L ... arbitrary
L1L2L3
PEN
F1L1L2L3
PEN
L1L2L3
PEN
L ... arbitrary
G1L-50-16-L(39789)
G1L-65-16-L(39790)
L1L2L3
PEN
SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)
SJB-25E-3N-MZS(38358)
SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)
SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)
3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1(39027)
+
SJB-25-3N-MSZSJB-25-3N-MSZ
SVBC-12, 5 SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12, 5 SVBC-50
SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12,5
F1L1L2L3PEN
L1L2L3PE N
L ... arbitrary
SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)
SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)
F1L1L2L3PEN
L1L2L3PEN
G1L-50-16-L(39789)
3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1(39027)
SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12, 5
Medium installation threat
TN-C
TN-C-S
TN-S, TT
a) Family houses
��Where there is a threat of direct lightning stroke to the protected building or to the nearby building with lightning conductor
which is galvanically connected to the protected building - level of protection against lightning LPL III or LPL IV.
��With overhead cable line.
b) Individual housing units
��In the block of fl ats where it is not possible to install common fi rst protection stage T1 in the main switchboard and where
due to lightning current separation in several branches its level does not exceed 12.5 kA (10/350 μs).
STANDARD SOLUTION SOLUTION FOR NECESSARY SEPARATION OF T1 AND T2
Minia
D28
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONSBig installation threat
TN-C
TN-C-S
TN-S, TT
a) Family houses with lightning conductor or exposed conductive
parts
��Independent on connection type.
��Where there is a threat of direct lightning stroke to the protected
building or to the nearby building with lightning conductor which is
galvanically connected to the protected building - level of protection
against lightning LPL I or LPL II.
b) Individual housing units
��In the block of fl ats where it is not possible to install common fi rst
protection stage T1 in the main switchboard and where the
lightning current can exceed 12.5 kA (10/350 μs).
STANDARD SOLUTION SOLUTION FOR NECESSARY SEPARATION OF T1 AND T2
F1L1L2L3N
L1L2L3PEN
PE
F1L1L2L3
PEN
L1L2L3
PEN
SJBC-25E-3N-MZS(38362)
SJBC-25E-3-MZS(38361)
F2 if F1 > 315 A
F2 if F1 > 315 A
F1L1L2L3PEN
L ... arbitrary
F1L1L2L3
PEN
L ... arbitrary
SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)
SJB-25E-3N-MZS(38358)
SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)
SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)
F2 if F1 > 315 A
F2 if F1 > 315 A
F3 if F1 > 125 A
F3 if F1 > 125 A
L1L2L3
PEN
L1L2L3
PEN
SJB-25-3N-MSZSJB-25-3N-MSZ
F1L1L2L3PEN
L1L2L3PEN
SJBC-25E-3-MZS(38361)
F2 if F1 > 315 A F1L1L2L3PEN
L ... arbitrary
SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)
SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)
F2 if F1 > 315 A if F1 > 125 AF3L1L2L3PEN
Minia
D29
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
T1+T2
Industrial and special applications
T1+T2
a) Industrial applications, where higher requirements for
overvoltage protections have to be met, e.g. due to high short-
circuit current
��The separation of lightning current is the same as in case of big
installation threat.
b) Buildings with two-conductor lead fulfi l the parameters of group
big installation threat
F1L1L2L3
PEN
+1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5
(34716)
3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)
+
3 pcs SVM-440-Z(34720)
F1L1L2L3PEN
L1L2L3
PEN
L1L2L3PEN
G1L-1000-16-L(39788)
G1L-1000-16-L(39788)
3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)
+3 pcs SVM-440-Z
(34720)
SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)
+
SVM-440-Z(34720)
F1L1PEN
L1PEN
F1L1L2L3
PEN
+1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5
(34716)
3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227)
3 pcsSVM-440-Z(34720)
F1L1L2L3PEN
L1L2L3
PEN
L1L2L3PEN
G1L-1000-16-L(39788)
G1L-1000-16-L(39788)
3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)
+
3 pcs SVM-440-Z(34720)
SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)
SVM-440-Z(34720)
F1L1PEN
L1PEN
G1L-50-16-L(39789)
G1L-65-16-L(39790)
F2 if F1 > 125 A F3 if F1 > 125 A
F3 if F1 > 125 A
F3 if F1 > 125 A
F2 if F1 > 500 A
F2 if F1 > 500 A
F2 if F1 > 500 A
F2 if F1 > 125 A
F2 if F1 > 125 A
3 pcs SVM-NPE-Z(34723)
TN-C
TN-S
TN-C
STANDARD SOLUTION SOLUTION FOR NECESSARY SEPARATION OF T1 AND T2
Minia
D30
Overvoltage protections
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
Max. operating voltage Uc = 1000 V
Photovoltaic systems
a) Photovoltaic sources up to 1000 V d.c.
��Where there is no threat of direct stroke to the solar panel or lines.
��Dependent on the length of line between the panels and the inverter one or two devices are used. In general, at the length
of line L1 > 10 m we use the overvoltage protection at both the solar panel and the inverter, at the length of the line
L ≤ 10 m we use the overvoltage protection either at the solar panel or at the inverter.
��Versions for 1000 V d.c. and 600 V d.c.
DC Switch-disconnector
AC Switch
-disconnectorConverterMeasuring
Protection against
overvoltage
Protection against
overvoltage
Protection against
overvoltage
Photovoltaic arraySwitchboard MeasuringMain switch
-disconnector
Transformer
L1
hWhW
DC AC
Main
protection
Max. operating voltage Uc = 600 V
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ
SVF-1000-V SVF-1000-B SVF-1000- V
L+ L-
U 2,5kVI 15kA
p
n
U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
U 2,5kVI 15kA
p
n
PE
L-L+L-
L1 10m≤
L+
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ
SVF-1000-V SVF-1000-B SVF-1000- V
L+ L-
U 2,5kVI 15kA
p
n
U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
U 2,5kVI 15kA
p
n
L+L-
L+L-
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ
SVF-1000-V SVF-1000- B S VF-1000- V
L+ L-
U 2,5kVI 15kA
p
n
U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
U 2,5kVI 15kA
p
n
L1 > 10 m
PE PE
S(3 )
VF-1000-2VB-MZ9165
S(3 )
VF-1000-2VB-MZ9165
S(3 )
VF-1000-2VB-MZ9165
L+L-
L+L-
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ
SVF-600- V SVF-600-B SVF-600- V
L+ L-
U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
� U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
� U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
�
L1 10m≤
PE
L+L-
L+L-
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ
SVF-600- V SVF-600-B SVF-600- V
L+ L-
U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
� U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
� U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
�
SVF-1000-2VB-MZ
SVF-600- V SVF-600-B SVF-600- V
L+ L-
U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
� U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
� U 3kVI 15kA
p
n
�
L1> 10m
PE PE
S(3 )
VF-600-3V-MZ9528
S(3 )
VF-600-3V-MZ9528
S(3 )
VF-600-3V-MZ9528
Minia
E
��Installation relays......................................................................................................................E2
��Installation contactors............................................................................................................E4
��Priority current relays............................................................................................................. E11
��Multiple-function time relays............................................................................................. E13
��Time relays..................................................................................................................................... E17
��Impulse memory relay............................................................................................................. E20
��Stair switches................................................................................................................................ E24
��Timers............................................................................................................................................... E27
��Tumbler power switches........................................................................................................ E29
��Tumbler switches........................................................................................................................ E35
��Rocker-type switches and change-over switches.................................................... E38
��Push-button switches.............................................................................................................. E40
��Control push-buttons................................................................................................................ E42
��Signal lights................................................................................................................................... E45
��Electric bells and buzzers....................................................................................................... E47
��Power supplies............................................................................................................................. E48
��Socket outlets.............................................................................................................................. E51
��Interconnecting busbars........................................................................................................ E52
��Terminal extensions................................................................................................................. E57
��Terminal board............................................................................................................................ E59
OTHER DEVICES
Minia
E2
Other devices
Installation relays RPR-16-..
��For switching of electric appliances up to 16 A – electric
boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves,
lighting etc.
��For automation purposes in connection with a multiple-
-function time relay MCR, impulse relay MIR, priority
relay RLP, signal light MKA, program timer MAP, MAR,
tumbler switches MSP, control push-buttons MTX etc.
��Light indication at power up.
��Noiseless switching.
��Contacts: 1 make-and-break.
��Control voltage: 24 V a.c./d.c.; 230 V a.c.
��There is ensured such electrical isolation between the
control circuit (coil) and main circuit (contact) as it is
between inlet and outlet lead of the safety transfor-
mer.
Rated voltage Colour Type Product Number Weight PackageU
c of indication code of modules [kg] [pcs]
24 V a.c. / d.c., 230 V a.c.red RPR-16-001-X230-SC 35668 1 0.07 1green RPR-16-001-X230-SE 35669 1 0.07 1
Rated voltage Colour Type Product Number Weight PackageU
c of indication code of modules [kg] [pcs]
24 V a.c. / d.c., 230 V a.c.red RPR-08-002-X230-SC 35670 1 0.07 1green RPR-08-002-X230-SE 35671 1 0.07 1
Installation relays RPR-08-...
��For switching of electric appliances up to 8 A – electric
boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves,
lighting etc.
��For automation purposes in connection with a multiple-
-function time relay MCR, impulse relay MIR, priority
relay RLP, signal light MKA, program timer MAP, MAR,
tumbler switches MSP, control push-buttons MTX etc.
��Light indication at power up.
��Noiseless switching.
��Contacts: 2 make-and-break.
��Control voltage: 24 V a.c./d.c.; 230 V a.c.
��There is ensured such electrical isolation between the
control circuit (coil) and main circuit (contact) as it is
between inlet and outlet lead of the safety transfor-
mer.
INSTALLATION RELAYS
Minia
E3
Other devices
INSTALLATION RELAYS
Dimensions
17.5 17.5
35~88
24~4.5
44
62 2
45 65.5 86
14
A3
12
A2A1
111214
A2A3
11
A1
2224
21
RPR-16-.. RPR-08-..
Diagram
RPR-16... RPR-08...
A1 A3
A2 11
12 14 A1 A3 12 14
A2 1121
22 24
Type RPR-16-... RPR-08-...
Standards EN 60669-2-2 EN 60669-2-2
Approval marks
Main circuit (contact)
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 002
Rated operating voltage / current Ue / I
eAC-1 250 V a.c. / 16 A 250 V a.c. / 8 A
DC-1 24 V d.c. / 16 A 30 V d.c. / 8 A
Max. switched power AC 4000 VA 2000 VA
DC 384 W 240 W
Min. voltage / current 5 V d.c. / 100 mA -
Signalling at power up red / green LED red / green LED
Mechanical endurance 20 000 000 operating cycles 5 000 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 50 000 operating cycles (AC), 30 000 (DC) 100 000 operating cycles
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm
Control circuit (coil)
Rated voltage Uc
terminals A1, A2 24 V a.c./d.c. 24 V a.c./d.c.
terminals A2, A3 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Input power at Uc 24 V a.c. 0.42 VA 0.32 VA
Uc 24 V d.c. 0.43 W 0.35 W
Uc 230 V a.c. 5.5 VA 5.5 VA
Rated frequency fn
50 Hz 50 Hz
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 55 °C -20 ÷ + 55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Specifi cations
Minia
E4
Other devices
Installation contactors 20 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
10 230 V a.c. RSI-20-10-A230 36609 1 0.13 1
20230 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A230 36610 1 0.13 124 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A024 36614 1 0.13 1
11230 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A230 36611 1 0.13 124 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A024 36615 1 0.13 1
02230 V a.c. RSI-20-02-A230 36612 1 0.13 124 V a.c. RSI-20-02-A024 36616 1 0.13 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Installation contactors 25 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
40230 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A230 36617 2 0.23 124 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A024 36621 2 0.23 1
31230 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A230 36618 2 0.23 124 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A024 36622 2 0.23 1
04 230 V a.c. RSI-25-04-A230 36620 2 0.23 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Installation contactors 40 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
40230 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A230 36625 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A024 36629 3 0.38 1
31230 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A230 36626 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A024 36630 3 0.38 1
04 230 V a.c. RSI-40-04-A230 36628 3 0.38 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Installation contactors 63 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
40230 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A230 36633 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A024 36637 3 0.38 1
31230 V a.c. RSI-63-31-A230 36634 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-63-31-A024 36638 3 0.38 1
04 230 V a.c. RSI-63-04-A230 36636 3 0.38 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Installation contactors
��For switching of appliances up to 63 A – electric boilers,
direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves,
lighting etc.
��Control voltage: 24 V a.c., 230 V a.c.
��Visual light indication at power up.
��Decreased switching noise and vibration.���
INSTALLATION CONTACTORS
Minia
E5
Other devices
Installation contactors with manual control
��For switching of electric appliances up to 63 A – electric
boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator sto-
ves, lighting etc.
��Control voltage: 24, 230 V a.c.
��Visual light indication at power up.
��Decreased switching noise and vibration.
��They are equipped with change-over switch with three
positions:����- position „AUTO“ – common function of the contactor
- position „I“ – make contacts close and break con-
tacts open. If rated voltage Uc is applied on the
contactor coil, the switch will go to position
„AUTO“
- position „O“ – contactor coil circuit is interrupted
Installation contactors 20 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
20230 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A230-M 36641 1 0.135 124 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A024-M 36643 1 0.135 1
11230 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A230-M 36642 1 0.135 124 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A024-M 36644 1 0.135 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Installation contactors 25 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
40230 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A230-M 36645 2 0.235 124 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A024-M 36647 2 0.235 1
31230 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A230-M 36646 2 0.235 124 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A024-M 36648 2 0.235 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Installation contactors 40 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
40230 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A230-M 36649 3 0.39 124 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A024-M 36651 3 0.39 1
31230 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A230-M 36650 3 0.39 124 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A024-M 36652 3 0.39 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Installation contactors 63 A
Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U
ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]
40 230 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A230-M 36653 3 0.39 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
INSTALLATION CONTACTORS
Minia
E6
Other devices
Auxiliary switch
��For signalling the main contact position of installation
contactors.
��Installation: by means of plastic latches on the right side
of the installation contactor.
��It is possible to mount one auxiliary switch on one
installation contactor.
��Width: 9 mm.
Accessories
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
11 PS-RSI-1100 36657 0.5 0.03 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
INSTALLATION CONTACTORS
Minia
E7
Other devices
INSTALLATION CONTACTORS
Working position
0°
180°
Specifi cations
Dependency on ambient temperature��If several contactors are installed in parallel in a switchboard, the following rules shall apply:
- installation contactors RSI-25-.., RSI-40-.. RSI-63-.. can be installed in parallel without limitation up to ambient
temperature of 55°C
- for installation contactor RSI-20-.. at ambient temperature up to 40 °C, a 0.5 gap must be left after every third
contactor. At ambient temperature between 40 °C and 55 °C a gap of 0.5 module must be left after every second
contactor
Type RSI-20-... RSI-25-... RSI-40-... RSI-63-... PS-RSI-1100
Standards EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-5-1
EN 61095 EN 61095 EN 61095 EN 61095
Approval marks
Contacts
Arrangement of contacts 1) 10, 20, 11, 02 40, 31, 04 40, 31, 04 40, 31, 04 11
Rated thermal current Ith
20 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 6 A
Rated operating voltage Ue
230 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Rated operating current Ie
AC-1 230 V a.c. 20 A 25 A 40 A 63 A -
DC-1
24 V d.c. 20 A 25 A 40 A 63 A -
110 V d.c. 1 A 2 A 4 A 4 A -
220 V d.c. 0,5 A 0,5 A 0,8 A 0,8 A -
AC-15230 V a.c. 6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A
400 V a.c. 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A
Switched powerAC-1 / AC –7a
230 V a.c. 4 kW 9 kW 16 kW 24 kW -
400 V a.c. - 16 kW 26 kW 40 kW -
AC-3 / AC –7b230 V a.c. 1.3 kW 2) 2.2 kW 5.5 kW 8.5 kW -
400 V a.c. - 4 kW 11 kW 15 kW -
Min. switched power 17 V / 50 mA 17 V / 50 mA 17 V / 50 mA 17 V / 50 mA 12 V / 10 mA
Switching frequency max. 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h
Electrical endurance at Ie
AC-1 / AC-7a 200 000 operating cycles 200 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles -
AC-3 / AC-7b 300 000 operating cycles 500 000 operating cycles 150 000 operating cycles 150 000 operating cycles -
Mechanical endurance 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles
Power loss at Ie per pole 1,7 VA 2,2 VA 4 VA 8 VA -
Short-circuit protection - fuse gG 20 A 35 A 63 A 80 A 6 A
Coordination type 1 1 1 1 1
Min. distance between open contacts 3.6 mm 3.6 mm 3.4 mm 3.4 mm 4 mm
Make time 3) 15 ÷ 25 ms (10 ms) 10 ÷ 20 ms (10 ms) 15 ÷ 20 ms (5 ÷ 10 ms) 15 ÷ 20 ms (5 ÷ 10 ms) -
Break time 3) 20 ms (20 ÷ 25 ms) 20 ms (25 ÷ 30 ms) 10 ms (10 ÷ 15 ms) 10 ms (10 ÷ 15 ms) -
Connection – conductor rigid 1 ÷ 10 mm2 1 ÷ 10 mm2 1 ÷ 25 mm2 1 ÷ 25 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Connection – conductor rigid with a sleeve 1 ÷ 6 mm2 1 ÷ 6 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 2 Nm 2 Nm 0.6 Nm
Control circuit (coil)
Rated voltage Uc
24, 230 V a.c. 24, 230 V a.c. 24, 230 V a.c. 24, 230 V a.c. -
Operating range 85 ÷ 110 % 85 ÷ 110 % 85 ÷ 110 % 85 ÷ 110 % -
Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz -
Power loss - at operation 4) 15 VA / 13 W 27 VA / 17 W 62 VA / 50 W 62 VA / 50 W -
(6 VA / 3.8 W) (5.2 VA / 2 W) (15.4 VA / 6 W) (15.4 VA / 6 W)
Power loss – holding 3 VA / 1.9 W 2.6 VA / 1 W 7.7 VA / 3W 7.7 VA / 3W -
Connection – conductor rigid 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 -
Connection – conductor rigid with a sleeve 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 -
Torque 0.6 Nm 0.6 Nm 0.6 Nm 0.6 Nm -
Other data
Rated insulation voltage Ui
440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 500 V a.c.
Rated impulse voltage Uimp
4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 -
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C
Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5)
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Only for making contact3) Values in parentheses are valid for break-type contact4) Values in parentheses are valid for installation contactors with manual control with switch in position „I“5) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín
Minia
E8
Other devices
INSTALLATION CONTACTORS
Switching of resistance or slightly inductive load in DC circuits (utilization category DC-1)
Installation contactor Contact load
Type Operating voltage Ue 1 contact 2 contacts in series 3 contacts in series 4 contacts in series
RSI-20-...24 V d.c. 20 A 20 A - -
110 V d.c. 1 A 3 A - -220 V d.c. 0.5 A 1.5 A - -
RSI-25-...24 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A
110 V d.c. 2 A 4 A 6 A 8 A220 V d.c. 0.5 A 1.5 A 2.5 A 3.5 A
RSI-40-...24 V d.c. 40 A 40 A 40 A 40 A
110 V d.c. 4 A 10 A 30 A 40 A220 V d.c. 0.8 A 6 A 20 A 40 A
RSI-63-...24 V d.c. 63 A 63 A 63 A 63 A
110 V d.c. 4 A 10 A 35 A 63 A220 V d.c. 0.8 A 6 A 30 A 63 A
Switching of lights - maximum number of light fi ttings per one contact at 230 V a.c., 50 Hz (utilization category AC-5a, AC-5b)
Light bulbs
Installation contactor Lighting fi tting
Type 60 W 100 W 200 W 500 W 1000 W
RSI-20-... 23 14 7 3 1RSI-25-... 29 16 8 3 1RSI-40-... 65 40 20 8 4RSI-63-... 85 50 25 10 5
Fluorescent tubes
Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallel Duo connection
Type 18 W 36 W 58 W 18 W / 4,5 μF 36 W / 4,5 μF 58 W / 7 μF 2x 18 W 2x 36 W 2x 58 W
RSI-20-... 22 17 14 7 7 4 30 17 10RSI-25-... 24 20 17 8 8 5 40 24 14RSI-40-... 90 65 45 48 48 31 100 65 40RSI-63-... 140 95 70 73 73 47 150 95 60
Fluorescent tubes with electronic ballast (ECG)
Installation contactor Lighting fi tting
Type 18 W 36 W 58 W 2x 18 W 2x 36 W 2x 58 W
RSI-20-... 25 15 14 12 7 7RSI-25-... 35 20 19 17 10 9RSI-40-... 100 52 50 50 26 25RSI-63-... 140 75 72 70 38 36
High-pressure mercury discharge lamps (HQL)
Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallel
Type 50 W 80 W 125 W 250 W 400 W 700 W 1000 W 50 W/7 μF 80 W/8 μF 125 W/10 μF 250 W/18 μF 400 W/25 μF 700 W/45 μF 1000 W/60 μF
RSI-20-... 14 10 7 4 2 1 1 4 4 3 1 1 0 0RSI-25-... 18 13 9 5 3 2 1 5 5 4 2 1 0 0RSI-40-... 38 29 20 10 7 4 3 31 27 22 12 9 5 4RSI-63-... 55 42 29 15 10 6 4 47 41 33 18 13 7 5
Metal halide discharge lamps (HQI)
Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallelType 70 W 150 W 250 W 400 W 1000 W 2000 W 70 W/12 μF 150 W/20 μF 250 W/33 μF 400 W/35 μF 1000 W/95 μF 2000 W/148 μF
RSI-20-... 10 5 3 3 1 0 2 1 0 0 0 0RSI-25-... 12 7 4 3 1 0 3 1 1 0 0 0RSI-40-... 23 12 7 6 2 1 18 11 6 6 2 1RSI-63-... 32 18 10 9 3 1 25 15 9 8 3 2
Minia
E9
Other devices
INSTALLATION CONTACTORS
High-pressure sodium discharge lamps (NAV)
Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallel
Type 150 W 250 W 400 W 1000 W 150 W / 20 μF 250 W / 33 μF 400 W / 48 μF 1000 W / 106 μF
RSI-20-... 5 3 2 0 1 0 0 0RSI-25-... 6 4 2 1 1 1 0 0RSI-40-... 17 10 6 3 11 6 4 2RSI-63-... 22 13 8 3 16 10 6 3
Low-pressure sodium discharge lamps
Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallel
Type 18 W 35 W 55 W 90 W 135 W 180 W 18 W / 5 μF 35 W / 20 μF 55 W / 20 μF 90 W / 26 μF 135 W / 45 μF 180 W / 40 μF
RSI-20-... 22 7 7 7 3 3 6 1 1 1 - -RSI-25-... 27 9 9 5 4 4 7 1 1 1 - -RSI-40-... 71 23 23 14 10 10 44 11 11 8 4 5RSI-63-... 90 30 30 19 13 13 66 16 16 12 7 8
Dimensions
45 90
44
64
9
17.5
45 90
44
64
7
4.5
35 447
64
45 90
4.5
54 447
64
45 90
4.5
RSI-20-.. RSI-25-..
RSI-40-... RSI-63-.. PS-RSI-1100
Minia
E10
Other devices
INSTALLATION CONTACTORSDiagram
RSI-20-10-.. RSI-20-02-..
RSI-25-40-.., RSI-40-40-.., RSI-63-40-.. RSI-25-31-.., RSI-40-31-.., RSI-63-31-.. RSI-25-04-.., RSI-40-04-.., RSI-63-04-..
2
1
A2
A1
A2
A1
842 6
1 3 75
A2
A1
42 6
531
R8A2
A1 R7
R8R2 R4 R6
R7R5R3R1
A2
A1
PS-RSI-1100
44
43
32
31
RSI-20-20-. .
42
1 3
A2
A1
RSI-20-11-..
R42
1 R3A1
A2 R4R2
R1 R3
Minia
E11
Other devices
��They monitor the strength of current in the circuit and
close/open the contact (terminals 1, 2) at a jump ex-
ceeding of a guaranteed switched current.
��They make it possible to interrupt the power supply
of one (non-priority) circuit, if the current of the other
(priority) circuit jumps to a set value.
��They are most frequently installed in distribution
systems where concurrent operation of more
appliances is not possible because of risk of exceeding
a permitted power input.
��For example, the relays can disconnect electric heating,
a storage block heater from the network if an
instantaneous water heater is switched – therefore
it is possible to select a main circuit breaker and
conductors for a lower power input.
��They make it possible to increase the number
of appliances for existing installations.
��In the circuits with electronic (e.g. thyristor) control,
they cannot be used directly, but with a time-delay
relay – see connection examples.
��Maximum current through the current coil: depending
on design (15 A, 28 A, 63 A).
��Maximum current through the contact: 16 A.
Operating current Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Packagerange I
nof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
5 ÷ 15 A01 RLP-15-01 35548 1 0.115 110 RLP-15-10 35549 1 0.115 1
10 ÷ 28 A01 RLP-28-01 35550 1 0.115 110 RLP-28-10 35551 1 0.115 1
26 ÷ 63 A01 RLP-63-01 35552 1 0.115 110 RLP-63-10 35553 1 0.115 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
RLP selection-.. according to power output of the switched appliance
Appliance type RLP-..Voltage Power output [kW]
230 V a.c.1.2 ÷ 3.4 RLP-15-..2.3 ÷ 6.4 RLP-28-..
6.0 ÷ 14.5 RLP-63-..
400 V a.c.3.4 ÷ 10.0 RLP-15-..6.9 ÷ 19.3 RLP-28-..
18.0 ÷ 43.5 RLP-63-..
Type RLP-..
Approval marks
Contact (terminals 1,2)
Arrangement of contacts 1) 10, 01
Rated voltage/current AC-1 Ue/I
n 250 V a.c. / 16 A
Electrical endurance 75 000 operating cycles
Switching frequency max. 1200 operating cycles/h
Connection 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm
Current coil (terminals A1, A2)
Operating current range In 5 ÷ 15 A, 10 ÷ 28 A, 26 ÷ 63 A
Guaranteed switched current for In 2) range 5 ÷ 15 ≥ 5 A
range 10 ÷ 28 ≥ 10 A
range 26 ÷ 63 ≥ 26 A
Guaranteed unswitched current for In
2) range 5 ÷ 15 ≤ 2 A
range 10 ÷ 28 ≤ 6 A
range 26 ÷ 63 ≤ 16 A
Connection - terminals A1, A2 0.75 ÷ 16 mm2
Torque 2 Nm
Power loss 3 W
Other data
Isolation voltage Ui
400 V a.c.
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ 50 °C
Working position arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Only for jump increase in current
Specifi cations
PRIORITY CURRENT RELAYS
Minia
E12
Other devices
PRIORITY CURRENT RELAYS
��For example, at blocking of consumption of an electric heater (a non-
priority appliance) the current coil (terminals A1, A2) is connected
in the circuit of an instantaneous water heater (a priority appliance)
at switching the latter on, and control contact (terminals 1, 2) is
connected in the circuit of the electric heater contactors. So if the
instantaneous water heater is switched on and the current steeply
reaches so called “guaranteed switched current”, the control break
contact will interrupt the power supply of contactor, and subsequently
disconnects the electric boiler.
Dimensions
17.5 4.5 44
62
45 85.8
A2
2
1
A1
RLP-..
Diagram
RLP-..-10
I>
2
1
A2
A1
RLP-..-01
I>
2
1
A2
A1
Connection examples
Instantaneous
water heater
Electric
heater
N NL L1 L2 L3
A1
A2 2
1
842 6
1 3 75
A2
A1
RLP-...-01
RSI-...-40
-...
L
I>
MCR
-08-00
1-UNI
N NL L1 L2 L3
A1
A2 2
1
842 6
1 3 75
A2
A1
RLP-...-10
RSI-...-40
-...
L
I>
TA1
A2
T
1816
15
N L
Load with
electronic control
Electric
heater
��At priority switching of an appliance with electronic control the relay function is troubled
(the relay is synchronized with the electronic control). For this reason it is recommended
to connect a time-delay relay in the control contact circuit.
Minia
E13
Other devices
Multiple-function time relays
��For switching of electric circuits up to 8 A depending
on the set time, function and connection.
��Mainly for automation purposes.
��They can be used as a stair switch.
��Time range: 0.1 s ÷ 100 h.
��Big number of functions with various control options:
delayed operation, impulse after switching on, interval
relay beginning with a pause/impulse, reaction
to leading/trailing edge, reaction to connection/
disconnection of supply voltage, reaction only to
a control impulse edge, ...
��Supply voltage: 230 V a.c. or universal
(12 ÷ 230 V a.c./d.c.).
��Time and function setting by knobs and change-over
switches on the front panel of the device.
��Light indication at contact closing 15-18.
��Light indication of presence of supply voltage.
��Each impulse led on input T causes restart of timing
depending on the set function.
Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight PackageU
ncode of modules [kg] [pcs]
230 V a.c. MCR-08-001-A230 35568 1 0.115 1universal 1) MCR-08-001-UNI 35569 1 0.115 11) Universal rated voltage = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c.
Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
OD-MIR-BK 35676 1 0.05 1
Accessories
Compensation block
��it enables control of the relay by 1 to 3 control push-
buttons with glow discharge tube.
��Connection: parallel with MCR.
��Rated voltage: 230 V a.c.
��Max. voltage : 400 V a.c.
��Capacity: 3 x 1 μF.
MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS
Minia
E14
Other devices
MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS
Change-over switch Un and TL
� for setting of starting method:
Un – relay starts at connection of supply voltage or
application of impulse on T terminal
TL – relay starts by impulse application on terminal T
Change-over switch and
� for setting of response to control impulse edge
leading edge of the control impulse
trailing edge of the control impulse
Change-over switches IZ/ZP and MON/AST
� for function setting (for function table see page E16)
IZ – impulse after switching on
ZP – delayed operation
MON – monostable function
AST – astable function
Control knobs
� for switching time setting
upper dial – defi nes time range – 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min,
1 hour, 10 hours, 100 hours
lower dial – for setting of a multiple of the time range
(0.05 ÷ 1)
minimum set time: 0.1 s
maximum set time: 100 h
Terminals A1-A2 for connection of supply voltage
� Rated voltage Un = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c. or 230 V a.c.
� In AC circuits L and N conductors can be arbitrarily
connected to terminals A1, A2.
In DC circuits the (+) conductor must be connected
to terminal A1, and (-) to terminal A2.
Terminal T for control of relay
� Control impulse can be excited by connection of A1-T.
� Min./max. excitation time: 15 ms/compensated.
� The relay can be controlled by 1 to 3 control push-buttons
with a glow discharge tube provided a power-factor ca-
pacitor 3 μF / 400 V is connected between terminals A2-T
- see connection diagram. For compensation it is possible
to use the compensation block OD-MIR-BK.
Indication
� indication of operational states is solved by two-colour LED
– presence of supply voltage Un is indicated by green
colour
– presence of supply voltage Un and closed contact 15-18 R
e
is indicated by orange colour
Description
T
A1 A2
16
1815
T
L N
M R- -001-C 08 UNI
A2
OD-MIR-BK
��
Minia
E15
Other devices
MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS
Specifi cations
Type MCR-08-001-...
Standards EN 61812-1
Approval marks
Main circuit (contact)
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001
Rated operating voltage Ue
250 V a.c., 24 V d.c.
Rated current In
8 A
Max. switched power 2000 VA / 192 W
Max. switched voltage 380 V a.c. / 150 d.c.
Min. voltage / current 5 V d.c. / 10 mA
Mechanical endurance 5 000 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 100 000 operating cycles
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Control circuit
Rated voltage Un
type MCR-08-001-A230 230 V
type MCR-08-001-UNI 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c.
Dwell between applied Un
0.1 s
Consumption at Un
at 12 / 230 V a.c. 0.7 VA / 2.1 VA
at 12 / 230 V d.c. 0.9 W / 1.2 W
Rated frequency 50 Hz
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Control impulse
Excitation 2) through interconnection of A1-T
Min. excitation time 15 ms
Max. excitation time compensated
Consumption at Un
at 12 /230 V a.c. 0.5 VA / 0.5 VA
at 12 / 220 V d.c. 1 W / 1 W
Time circuit
Range 0.1 s ÷ 100 hours
t setting method control knobs on the front panel
Stability of set value at permanent power supply max. 2 % t
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 50 °C
Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) The relay can be controlled by 1 to 3 control push-buttons with a glow discharge tube provided a power-factor capacitor 3 μF / 400 V is connected between terminals A2-T. For compensation it is possible to use so called “Compensation block OD-MIR-BK” (1 module on DIN rail).
Dimensions
17.5
~88
2
45 65.5 86
24
44
62
~4.5
18
T
16
A2A1
15
17.5
~88
24~4.5
44
62
45 65.5 86
A2A2A2
MCR-08-001-.. OD-MIR-BK
Minia
E16
Other devices
MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYSDiagram
MCR
TA1
A2
T
1816
15
A2
OD-MIR-BK
Graph
Minia
E17
Other devices
��Terminal ZP for setting of relay start
- If the terminal is not interconnected, the relay starts
in the mode of impulse after switching.
- If the terminal is interconnected with terminal A1, the
relay starts in delayed operation mode.
��Indication
- Indication of operational states is solved by two-colour LED
- presence of supply voltage Un is indicated by
green colour
- presence of supply voltage Un and closed
contact 15-18 Re is indicated by orange colour
��Terminals A1-A2 for connection of supply voltage
- Rated voltage Un = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷ 220 V d.c.
- Conductor L and N or (+) and (-) can be connected
arbitrarily to terminals A1, A2.
��Control knobs and change-over switches t1 , t
2
for switching time setting:
- Minimum set time t1 or t
2: 0,5 s.
- Maximum set time t1 or t
2: 120 min.
- Stability of set value of t1 and t
2 at permanent power
supply - max 2 % t1 or t
2 .
- Scale of both t1 and t
2 is linear.
�
��For periodical switching of electrical circuits up to 8 A
according to two mutually independent set times.
��Mainly for automation purposes.
��Time range: 0.5 s ÷ 120 min.
��Universal supply voltage:
12 V ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 V ÷ 220 V d.c.
��Possibility of selection of start of timing – delayed
operation/impulse after switching on.
��Light indication at contact closing (red LED).
��Light indication of presence of supply voltage (green
LED).
Description
Time relays
Rated voltage Un
Type Product Number Weight Package
AC/DC [V] code of modules [kg] [pcs]
Universal 1) MTR-08-001-UNI 35570 1 0.075 1
t , t1 2t , t1 2
0,5 s 12 s
12
5 s 120 s
12
0,5 min 12 min
12
5 min 120 min
12
1) Universal rated voltage = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷220 V d.c.
TIME RELAYS
Minia
E18
Other devices
TIME RELAYS
Type MTR-08-001-UNI
Standards EN 61812-1
Approval marks
Main circuit (contact)
Arrangement of contacts 1) 001
Rated operating voltage Ue 250 V a.c. / 24 V d.c.
Rated current In 8 A
Max. switched power 2000 VA / 192 W
Max. switched voltage 380 V a.c., 150 V d.c.
Min. voltage/current 5 V d.c. / 10 mA
Endurance - electrical/mechanical 100 000 operating cycles/5 000 000 operating cycles
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Control circuit (coil)
Rated control voltage Un 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷ 220 V d.c.
Dwell between applied Ue
3 s
Consumption at Ue
12/230 V a.c. 0.7 VA / 2.1 VA
12/220 V d.c. 0.9 W / 1.2 W
Rated frequency 50 ÷ 60 Hz
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Time circuit
Range 0.5 s ÷ 120 min
T setting method t1, t
2control knobs and switches on the front panel
Stability of set value at permanent power supply max. 2 % t1, t
2
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ 55 °C
Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Specifi cations
Dimensions
17.5
~88
24~4.5
44
62 2
45 65.5 86
18
ZP
16
A2A1
15
MTR-08-001-UNI
Minia
E19
Other devices
TIME RELAYS
Diagram
MTR-08-001-UNI
ZPA1
A2
1816
15
T
Graph
L LN N
Un Un
Re Re
t1 t1t1 t1t1 t1t1 t1t1 t1t2 t2t2 t2t2 t2t2 t2t2 t2
Un – rated voltage
Re – contact closing 15-18
t1 – set time on the switch t t
1 and on the knob t
1
t2 – set time on the switch t
2 and on the knob t
2
Un – rated voltage
Re – contact closing 15-18
t1 – set time on the switch t t
1 and on the knob t
1
t2 – set time on the switch t
2 and on the knob t
2
Minia
E20
Other devices
Impulse memory relay
��For electric circuit switching up to 16 A by impulse
command.
��However, mainly for control of lighting circuits from more
points in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc.
��It saves crossbar switches; the lighting can be controlled
by push-buttons instead of a combination of crossbar
and three-way switches.
��It saves conductors - it is possible to use smaller cross-
sections for the control circuit than for power circuit.
��It brings higher comfort of control - for example it is
possible to switch off all lights by one push-button
when leaving the house.
��The relay does not need permanent power supply;
it is supplied only for the time of control impulse
duration.
��The position of the make-and-break contact can only
be changed by applying an impulse on the following
inputs (supply voltage failures have no eff ect):
-�ON/OFF input - each impulse led on this input
changes the contact position (local control of the
impulse relay).
-�ON input - each impulse led on this input switches
the contact to position 11-14.
-�OFF input - each impulse led on this input switches
the contact to position 11-12.
Control voltage Type Product Number Weight PackageU
n code of modules [kg] [pcs]
230 MIR-16-001-A230 35675 1 0.085 1
Compensation block
��It enables control of relay by more than 15 control push-
buttons with glow discharge tube.
��Connection: parallel with MIR.
��Rated voltage: 230 V a.c.
��Max. voltage: 400 V a.c.
��Capacity: 3 x 1 μF.
Accessories
Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
OD-MIR-BK 35676 1 0.055 1
Multi-level central control block
��It enables multi-level central control of MIR.
��Rated voltage: 230 V a.c.
��Description: each impulse memory relay is locally
controlled by push-buttons (local control); each
level or set of impulse memory relays is controlled
simultaneously from relevant point (central control);
all levels are jointly controlled by a single command
from a point (central multi-level control).
Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
OD-MIR-CO 35677 1 0.05 1
IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY
Minia
E21
Other devices
IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY
Type MIR-16-001-A230
Standards EN 61812-1
Approval marks
Main circuit (contact)
Arrangement of contacts 1) 2) 001
Rated operating voltage Ue
230 V a.c.
Rated current In
AC-1 16 A
AC-5a 2 A
Max. switched power 2) 4000 VA
Lamp load max. 460 W
Max. fl uorescent tube load compensated cos φ = 0.8 8x 36 W
uncompensated cos φ = 0.5 25x 36 W, 13x 65 W
Min. switched power 50 mW (10 V / 5 mA)
Rated frequency fn
50 Hz
Mechanical endurance 10 000 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 100 000 operating cycles
Switching frequency 10 operating cycles/min
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Control circuit
Rated voltage Uc
230 V a.c.
Rated frequency fn
50 Hz
Min. excitation time 200 ms
Max. excitation time compensated
Min. time period between pulses 1 s
Max. number of push-buttons with glow lamp 1.1 mA 15 pcs 3)
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 50 °C
Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) Diff erent contact sequence or load increase can be solved by the use of installation contactors RSI3) On ON input and OFF output there must be the same number of push-buttons with a glow discharge tube. For the number of push-buttons with a glow discharge tube higher than 15 it is necessary to use the compensation bloc OD-MIR-BK
Specifi cations
Dimensions
17.517.517.5
~88
24~4.5
44
62
45 65.5 86
8
27
4
A2A26A2A25A2A2
OD-MIR-COOD-MIR-BKMIR-16-001-A230
ON/OFF
ONOFF
141211
Minia
E22
Other devices
IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY
Connection examples
Graph Diagram
Local control
��Each relay is locally controlled by push-buttons.
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
11-14
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
ONON/OFF OFF
1412
11
A2 5
7
6
2
8
4
OD-MIR-BK OD-MIR-CO
L N
Local control of impulse relays
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Minia
E23
Other devices
L N
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
OFF
ON
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
OFF
ON
5
7 4
8
2
6
OD-MIR-CO
OFF
ON
Central control of the 1st group impulse relays
Central control of the 2st group impulse relays Central control of the 2st group impulse relays
Central control of the 1st group impulse relaysCentral control of the 1st and 2st group
impulse relays
L N
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
OFF
ON
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
OFF
ON
Local control of impulse relays
Local control of impulse relays Local control of impulse relays
Local control of impulse relays
IMPULSE MEMORY RELAYLocal + central control��Each impulse relay is locally controlled by push-buttons (local control); each
level or set of impulse relays is controlled simultaneously from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central control).
Local + central + central multi-level control��Each impulse relay is locally controlled by push-buttons (local control); each level or set of impulse
relays is controlled simultaneously from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central multi-level control).
Connection of signalling of pushed button
��When the connection of signalling of pushed button is done according to the fi gure relay can be controlled only by ON/OFF input. In such case of signalling connection when the ON or OFF
button is pushed the current is closed through the relay electronics and thus can damage it.
L N
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
ON/OFF
ON
OFF
L N
MIR-16-001-A230
A2
14
12
11
ON/OFF
Signalling of pushed button Signalling of pushed button
I
Minia
E24
Other devices
Stair switch MQA-..
��Mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points
in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc.
��Possibility of 3-wire or 4-wire connection.
��Time setting (0.5 ÷�10 min) by the knob on the front
panel of the device.
��Max. 50 control push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA.
Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
MQA-16-100-A230 37210 1 0.086 1
Stair switch MQB-..
��Mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points
in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc.
��Possibility of 3-wire or 4-wire connection.
��Time setting (0.5 ÷�10 min) by the knob on the front
panel of the device.
��If the control push-button is pressed longer than 1 s, the
stair switch will switch on for a time four times longer
than the set time.
��Max. 50 control push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA.
��Warning before expiration of the set time - 20 and 40
seconds before expiration of the set time the stair
switch warns by indicator short fl ashing of oncoming
end of timing.
Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
MQB-16-100-A230 37211 1 0.086 1
Stair switch MQC-..
��Mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points
in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc.
��Possibility of 3-wire or 4-wire connection.
��Time setting (3 ÷� 60 min) by the knob on the front
panel of the device.
��Max. 50 control push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA.
��Warning before expiration of the set time - 20 and 40
seconds before expiration of the set time the stair
switch warns by indicator short fl ashing of oncoming
end of timing.
��The timing is terminated by pressing the push-button
again before 40 seconds to the end of the set time.The
timing cycle is restarted by pressing the push-button
again 40 or less seconds to the end of the set time.
Type Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
MQC-16-100-A230 37830 1 0.086 1
STAIR SWITCHES
Minia
E25
Other devices
STAIR SWITCHES
Type MQA-16-100-A230 MQB-16-100-A230 MQC-16-100-A230
Standards EN 60 669 EN 60 669 EN 61 812-1
Approval marks
Main circuit (contact)
Arrangement of contacts 1) 10 10 10
Rated operating voltage Ue
250 V a.c. 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c.
Rated current In
AC-1 16 A 16 A 16 A
Inductive load cosφ 0.6 10 A 10 A 10 A
Lamp load max. 2000 W 2000 W 2000 W
Max. fl uorescent tube load uncompensated 20 pcs 58 W 20 pcs 58 W 20 pcs 58 W
compensated in series 40 pcs 58 W 40 pcs 58 W 40 pcs 58 W
duo connection 2x 20 pcs 58 W 2x 20 pcs 58 W 2x 20 pcs 58 W
EVG = electronic ballast 5 pcs 20 W 5 pcs 20 W 5 pcs 20 W
Siemens ECG 10 pcs 58 W 10 pcs 58 W 10 pcs 58 W
Min. switched power 10 V / 300 mA 10 V / 300 mA 10 V / 300 mA
Rated frequency fn
50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz
Connection 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2
Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm
Control circuit
Rated control voltage Uc
230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Range of control voltage 90 ÷ 110 % Uc
90 ÷ 110 % Uc
90 ÷ 110 % Uc
Rated frequency fn
50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Power loss at standstill 0.7 W 1 W 1 W
at timing process 3.5 W 1.7 W 1.7 W
Time setting 0.5 ÷ 10 min 0.5 ÷ 10 min 3 ÷ 60 min
Min. excitation time 30 ms 30 ms 30 ms
Max. excitation time 2) compensated compensated compensated
Max. number of push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA 50 pcs 50 pcs 50 pcs
Reset by next impulse yes yes yes
Additional extension of the set time no yes 3) no
Warning before end of timing no yes 4) yes 4)
Connection 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2
Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -10 ÷ + 50 °C -10 ÷ + 50 °C -10 ÷ + 50 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts.2) The device is able to withstand permanent load either in switching the manual change-over switch on the front panel of the device or in control push-button locking.3) If the control push-button is closed for more than 1 s, the set time is extended four times.4) 20 and 40 seconds before expiration of the set time the stair switch warns by indicator short fl ashing of oncoming end of timing.
Specifi cations
Minia
E26
Other devices
STAIR SWITCHES
4-wire connection
230 V a.c.
3-wire connection
230 V a.c.
Dimensions Diagram
18 24
44
64 1.5
45 67 907
2L
1N
MQA-16-100-A230, MQB-16-100-A230, MQC-16-100-A230
L N
1 2
MQA-16-100-A230MQB-16-100-A230MQC-16-100-A230
Connection examples
Stair switch is controlled by switching of the phase conductor.
This connection is used mainly in new installations.
Stair switch is controlled by switching of the N-conductor.
This connection is used only in old installations.
Graph
t<te
L-2
Un
te te t<te
t<1s t>1st<1s t<1s
4x t
40 s
20 s
L-2
Un
tet >t>tee -40 ste40 s
20 s
L-2
40 s
20 s t -40 s>te
Un
te
te
MQA-16-100-A230 MQB-16-100-A230
MQC-16-100-A230
Minia
E27
Other devices
Mechanical program timer
��For real time load switching up to 16 A / 250 V.
��Daily program.
��Switching time setting: by plastic plates along the
perimeter of the dial.
��Shortest switching interval: 30 min.
��Change-over switch automatic run / permanent opera-
tion / permanent off .
��Run reserve: 100 hours.
Specifi cations
Design Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
standard 001 MAP-16-001-A230 36879 3 0.175 1mini 100 MAP-16-100-A230-MINI 36880 1 0.1 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Digital program timer
��For switching of of load of max. 16 A / 250 V a.c. in real time.
��Weekly and daily program.
��Switching time setting: by push-buttons on the front
panel of the device.
��Shortest switching interval: 1 min.
��Change-over switch automatic run / permanent opera-
tion / permanent off .
��Run reserve: 6 years from the manufacture date.
Number Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of channels of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
1 001 MAR-16-001-A230 36881 2 0.24 12 002 MAR-16-002-A230 36882 2 0.24 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Type MAP-16-001-A230 MAP-16-100-A230-MINI MAR-16-001-A230 MAR-16-002-A230
Approval marks
Main circuit (contact)
Arrangement of contacts 001 100 001 002
Rated operating voltage Ue 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c.
Rated current Ie AC-1 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A
Switched power AC-1 3 600 W 3 600 W 3 600 W 3 600 W
AC-3 1 000 W 1 000 W 1 800 W 1 800 W
AC-5a uncompensated 1 400 VA 1 400 VA 1 400 VA 1 400 VA
AC-5a compensated 7 μF 58 W 58 W 60 W 60 W
AC-5b 1 000 W 1 000 W 1 800 W 1 800 W
Min. switched power 4 V / 1 mA 4 V / 1 mA 12 V / 100 mA 12 V / 100 mA
Rated frequency fn 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Mechanical endurance 20 000 000 operating cycles 20 000 000 operating cycles 10 000 000 operating cycles 10 000 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles
Connection 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2
Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm
Time circuit
Min. switching interval 30 min 15 min 1 min 1 min
Min. time unit 15 min 15 min 1 min 1 min
Program daily daily weekly weekly
Number of memory places - - 56 28 on each channel
Pre-set blocks in the week - - Mo-Su, Mo-Fr, Sa-Su, individual Mo-Su, Mo-Fr, Sa-Su, individual
Run accuracy ± 2.5 s / day ± 2.5 s / day ± 0.86 s / day ± 0.86 s / day
Switching accuracy ± 5 min ± 5 min - -
Run reserve 100 hours 100 hours 6 years 6 years
Battery type NiMH NiMH Lithium Lithium
Charging time min 48 hours min 48 hours - -
Supply circuit
Rated control voltage Uc 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Operating range 85 ÷ 110 % Uc
85 ÷ 110 % Uc
85 ÷ 110 % Uc
85 ÷ 110 % Uc
Rated frequency fn 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz
Rated power loss Pv 1 VA 1VA 2 VA 2 VA
Connection 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2
Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -10 ÷ + 55 °C -10 ÷ + 55 °C -10 ÷ + 55 °C -10 ÷ + 55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
TIMERS
Minia
E28
Other devices
TIMERSDimensions
36
83
89
45
44
64
6
45 83
64
446
89
64
6 44
834588
44
64
6
45 83
89
53 17.8
MAP-16-001-A230
MAR-16-001-A230 MAR-16-002-A230
MAP-16-100-A230-MINI
U1U2142
4
36
856N
4
L21
12
NL
41
NL
Diagram
MAP-16-001-A230 MAP-16-100-A230-MINI MAR-16-001-A230 MAR-16-002-A230
1 1 1 1 5
U1 L
U2 N N N
82 4 L L L4 4 4 62 2
Minia
E29
Other devices
Tumbler power switches APN-..
��For building, commercial and industrial installations
up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c.
��For electric circuit switching.
��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches, undervol-
tage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting busbars etc.
��Possible interconnection by means of busbars.
Rated operating Number Type Product Number Weight Packagecurrent Ie of poles code of modules [kg] [pcs]
32 A
1 APN-32-1 34338 1 0.12 121+N APN-32-1N 34339 2 0.235 6
2 APN-32-2 34340 2 0.235 63 APN-32-3 34341 3 0.355 4
3+N APN-32-3N 34342 4 0.47 3
63 A
1 APN-63-1 34343 1 0.12 121+N APN-63-1N 34344 2 0.235 6
2 APN-63-2 34345 2 0.235 63 APN-63-3 34346 3 0.355 4
3+N APN-63-3N 34347 4 0.47 3
Tumbler power switches AST-..
��For building, commercial and industrial installations
up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c., 48 V d.c.
��For electric circuit switching.
��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches,
undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting
busbars etc.
��Possible interconnection by means of busbars.
Rated current Number Type Product Number Weight PackageI
nof poles code of modules [kg] [pcs]
125 A1 AST-125-1 37284 1.5 0.21 33 AST-125-3 37285 4.5 0.63 1
3+N AST-125-3N 37286 6 0.84 1
Accessories
Auxiliary switches PS-LS-.. page B19
Shunt trips SV-LS-.. page B22
Undervoltage releases SP-LS-.. page B25
Interconnecting busbars S1L-27-.., S3L-27-.., S4L-27-.. page E49
Terminal extensions AS-50-S-AL01, CS-FH000-.., N3x10-FH000 page E54
AccessoriesAuxiliary and relative switches PS-LP-.. page B19
Shunt trips SV-LP-.. page B22
Undervoltage releases SP-LP-.. page B25
Locking insert OD-LP-VU01 page B28
Sealing insert OD-LP-VP01 page B29
Interpole barriers OD-LP-MP01 page B30
Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. page E49
Terminal extensions AS-.. page E54
TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES
Minia
E30
Other devices
TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES
Specifi cations
Type APN-.. AST-..
Standards EN 60947-3 EN 60947-3
Approval marks
Number of poles 1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N 1, 3, 3+N
Rated operating current Ie
32 A, 63 A 125 A
Rated operating voltage Ue
230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c., 48 V d.c.
Max. operating voltage Umax
253/440 V a.c. 253/440 V a.c., 52 V d.c.
Min. operating voltage Umin
12 V a.c./d.c. 12 V a.c./d.c.
Rated frequency fn
40 ÷ 60 Hz 40 ÷ 60 Hz
Rated conditional short-circuit current with backup fuse max 1:1 gG 10 kA 10 kA
Mechanical endurance 20 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp
6 kV 6 kV
Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) IV IV
Utilization category AC-22A AC-22A, DC-22A
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Connection
Conductor Cu – rigid (solid stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5÷10) mm2 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2
Conductor Cu – flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2
Torque 2 Nm 3.5 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes yes
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 55 °C -20 ÷ + 55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary
Dimensions
7017.5 35 52.5
~73
64
72
86~90
~4.5 44
~4.5
45
APN-..-1 APN-..-1NAPN-..-2
APN-..-3 APN-..-3N
26.6
AST-..-1
79.8 106.4
74
70
71.5
9045
60
445.5
1.7
AST-..-3 AST-..-3N
Minia
E31
Other devices
TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES
Diagram
APN-..-2 APN-..-3, AST-..-3 APN-..-3N, AST-..-3N
31
42
1 53
2 64
3 5 N11
2 4 6 N2
APN-..-1, AST-..-1 APN-..-1N
1
2
N11
N22
Minia
E32
Other devices
Specifi cations
Switch-disconnector AVN-DC-63-4Rated operating Type Product Number Weight Package
current code of modules [kg] [pcs]
63 A AVN-DC-63-4 39752 4 0.672 1
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts code of modules [kg] [pcs]
11 1) PS-LV-1100-K 38938 0.5 0.05 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Type AVN-DC-63-4
Standards EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60669-1Approval marks
Number of poles 4
Rated operating current Ie 63 A
Rated operating voltage in connection 4 poles in series Ue 1000 V d.c.
Min. voltage / current 24 V / 300 mA
Rated short-time withstand current DC-1000 V 4 pole Icw 760 A
Rated short-circuit making capacity DC-1000 V 4 pole Icm 500 A
Mechanical endurance 10 000 operating cycles
Electrical endurance 5 000 operating cycles
Rated power losses per pole 4.4 W
Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp > 5 kV
Utilization category DC-21B
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Connection
Conductor Cu – rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2
Conductor Cu – flexible ( with a sleeve) 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2
Torque 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm
Top or bottom connection yes 1)
Operating conditions
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ + 45 °C
Working position Arbitrary1) It is necessary to observe the polarity marked on the device
��Switch-disconnector, in particular for photovoltaic applica-
tions with high rated operating voltage up to 1000 V d.c.
��New terminal system.
��Easy connection and check of conductors.
��Possibility of connection up to 4 conductors in the terminal.
��Possibility of connection conductors of various cross
sections.
��Easy installation by means of the new clip system on or
from DIN rail.
TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES
Auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100
��Accessories to AVN-DC-63-4.
��Installation: on the right side of the switch-disconnector.
��For signalling the position of contacts of the switch-
disconnector.
��Rated operating voltage / current: AC-14 230 V / 6 A,
DC-13 220 V / 1 A.
��Connection of conductors: 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2.
Minia
E33
Other devices
TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES
Diagram
Dimensions
64
70
35
6 44
45
AVN-DC-63-4.
90
72
909 6
45 90
73.3
44
64
68.5
PS-LV-1100
AVN-DC-63-4
3
42
1
8
7
6
5
+
-+
-+
-+
-
13 21
14 22
PS-LV-1100
Connection
Load
Both grounded and ungrounded systems
1000 V d.c.
Only ungrounded system
1000 V d.c.
Minia
E34
Other devices
TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES
Terminal systemDesign: two levels of terminals with a fi xed barrier between them.
Connection: each level enables connection of both the
conductor and interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars
with pins, type „S“ are shown on page E52). This is possible from
both sides of the device. For connection range see the table below.
Safety: the terminals are equipped with sliding plastic caps,
which eff ectively increase protection against dangerous
contact with live parts.
AdvantagesPossibility of connection:
� conductors of various cross sections
� up to 4 conductors in the terminal
� conductor of cross section up to 35 mm2
Mounting/demounting on/from „DIN“ rails
New system of latches enables:
� very quick mounting and demounting by hand, without
any tool needed.
� withdrawal/replacement of the switch-disconnector
from a row of devices interconnected by the
interconnecting busbar up or down without interruption
of adjacent circuit or removal of the busbar.
Connection range
Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve
Number of connected conductors Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 2
1× conductor1× ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2)
1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)
2× conductor
2× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2)
2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2)
1× ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 6 mm2)
1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)
1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)
3× conductor
1× ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 2,5 mm2)
1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2)
2× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)
4× conductor 2× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2)
Interconnecting busbars S1L-...
Interconnecting busbars S1L-...
Barrier Level 2
Level 1
Connection of conductors and interconnecting busbars
Minia
E35
Other devices
Tumbler switches
��For switching of up to 4 electric circuits up to 25 A.
��They can be used in both building and industrial
installations and in security technology.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
11 MSP-11 35865 1 0.084 122 MSP-22 35870 1 0.094 140 MSP-40 35874 1 0.094 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Tumbler switches with signalling
��For electric circuit switching up to 25 A.
��They can be used in both building and industrial
installations and in security technology.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
��Installed indicator light of white colour 230 V a.c. can be
replaced by other one.
��Indicator light is connected between the contact and
the terminal (see the diagram).
Colour Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of indicator light of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
white 11 MSP-11-SG-A230 37262 1 0.0940 120 MSP-20-SG-A230 37263 1 0.0940 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Colour Rated Type Product Weight Packageof cover voltage code [kg] [pcs]
red 230 V a.c. SC-A230 11102 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SC-X024 11106 0.003 12
green 230 V a.c. SE-A230 11103 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SE-X024 11107 0.003 12
yellow 230 V a.c. SD-A230 11104 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SD-X024 11108 0.003 12
white 230 V a.c. SG-A230 11101 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SG-X024 11105 0.003 12
Indicator lights
��Accessories for tumbler switches with signalling as sub-
stitute for the installed white indicator light.
��Indicator light power: 0.8 W
��Indicator light contains a LED.
��Indicator lights light permanently.
Accessories
TUMBLER SWITCHES
Minia
E36
Other devices
TUMBLER SWITCHES
Type MSP-.. MSP-..-SG-A230
Standards EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1
Approval marks
Contacts
Arrangement of contacts 1) 11, 22, 40 11, 20
Rated operating voltage Ue
230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c.
Rated thermal current Ith
25 A 25 A
Rated operating current Ie
AC-12 25 A 25 A
AC-15 6 A 6 A
DC-12 1 A 1 A
Mechanical endurance 30 000 operating cycles 30 000 operating cycles
Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
Light signalling
Power output - 0.8 W
Rated operating voltage Ue
- 24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c.
Colour of cover - white, red, green, yellow 2)
Light - permanent
Source - LED
Dispersion - by raster in front of LED
Connection - 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2
Torque - 0.8 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C -25 ÷ +55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts.2) Tumbler switch with signalling contains a white indicator light; other colour can be bought as accessories.
Specifi cations
Dimensions
17.5 24
44
60 10
5.5
45 65.5 8689
75
1
2
6
4
8
3
MSP-..
Diagram
MSP-11 MSP-11-SG-A230 MSP-20-SG-A230
3
4
1
2
1 5
(+)2 64
5
4 6
1
(+)2
MSP-22
5 73
6 84
1
2
MSP-40
2 4 6 8
1 3 5 7
Minia
E37
Other devices
TUMBLER SWITCHES
Replacement of indicator light
demounting tool
1
2
3demounting hole
��Installed indicator lights of white colour can be replaced by other ones (see accessories).
Indicator light demounting:
1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole and push to ensure that
the indicator light jumps up a little.
2) Remove the indicator light from the tumbler switch.
Installation of indicator light:
3) Insert and press the indicator light in the hole in the tumbler switch.
Connection examples
5
5
4
4
6
6
1
1
L1
L1
N
N
L2
L2
2
2
MSP
-20-
SG-A
230
MSP
-20-
SG-A
230
load
load
load
load
��The indicator light can be connected in two ways:
– to indicate load connection
– to indicate voltage presence and to enable easy fi nding of the switch
during the night-time
Indicator light indicates load connection Indicator light indicates presence of voltage
Minia
E38
Other devices
Rocker-type switches and change-over switches
��For electric circuit switching up to 16 A.
��Use in both building and industrial installations and
security technology.
��Switches with backlighting (glow lamp).
��Change-over switches with interposition.
��Change-over switches with interposition without
arresting.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
Specifi cations
Type MSK-10
MSK-10-..
MSK-001-1X2 MSK-001-102
MSK-001-1T2
Standards EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1
EN 60669-1 EN 60669-1 EN 60669-1
EN 60073 EN 60073 EN 60073
EN 61058-1 EN 61058-1 EN 61058-1
Approval marks
Contacts
Arrangement of contacts 1) 10 001 001
Rated operating voltage Ue
250 V a.c., 12 V d.c. 250 V a.c., 12 V d.c. 250 V a.c., 12 V d.c.
Min. switched power 300 mW 300 mW 300 mW
Min. voltage Umin
12 V 12 V 12 V
Rated thermal current Ith
16 A 10 A 6 A
Rated operating current Ie
AC-1 16 A 10 A 6 A
AC-15 10 A 6 A 4 A
AC-5a - cosφ=0,5 6 A 4 A 3 A
AC-5a - cosφ=0,9 2 A 1.1 A 0.7 A
AC-5b 4.4 A 2.6 A 1.7 A
DC-1 10 A 10 A 10 A
Electrical endurance 50 000 operating cycles 50 000 operating cycles 50 000 operating cycles
Mechanical endurance 100 000 op. cycles 100 000 op. cycles 50 000 operating cycles
Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ +55 °C -20 ÷ +55 °C -20 ÷ +55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
Design Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
Switch 10 MSK-10 35678 1 0.065 1Switch with red backlight 10 MSK-10-SC 35679 1 0.065 1Switch with green backlight 10 MSK-10-SE 35680 1 0.065 1Change-over switch 001 MSK-001-1X2 35682 1 0.065 1Change-over switch with intermediate position 001 MSK-001-102 35681 1 0.065 1
Change-over switch with interme-diate position without arrestment 001 MSK-001-1T2 35683 1 0.065 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts
ROCKER-TYPE SWITCHES AND CHANGE-OVER SWITCHES
Minia
E39
Other devices
ROCKER-TYPE SWITCHES AND CHANGE-OVER SWITCHES
Dimensions
244.5
44
62 6.5
45 65.5 8688
17.5
MSK-..
4
111
2
Diagram
MSK-10 MSK-10-.. MSK-001-1X2 MSK-001-102 MSK-001-1T2
21 1
4
2 1
I2
II4 1 1
2 2
II I a
o o4 4
I I
Minia
E40
Other devices
Type MST-22
Standards EN 60947-5-1
Approval marks
Contacts
Arrangement of contacts 1) 22
Rated operating voltage Ue
230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c.
Rated thermal current Ith
25 A
Rated operating current Ie
AC-12 25 A
AC-15 6 A
DC-12 1 A
Mechanical endurance 30 000 operating cycles
Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm
Push-buttons
Colour black, red, green, white 2)
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C
Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Push-button switch contains red and green push-button; the other colours can be bought as accessories
Push-button switches
��They can be used in both building and industrial
installations and in security technology.
��For electric circuit switching up to 25 A.
��The circuit is switched on permanently by upper green
push-button, and switched off by lower red push-button.
��Already installed push-button can be replaced.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
Specifi cations
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
22 MST-22 35555 1 0.12 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Colour Type Product Weight Package
code [kg] [pcs]
red TC 8930 0.002 12green TE 8931 0.002 12black TB 8932 0.002 12white TG 8934 0.002 12
Accessories
Push-buttons
��They are intended for replacement of the already
installed push-buttons.
PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES
Minia
E41
Other devices
PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES
Dimensions
17.5 24
44
62 7
5.5
89 45 65.5 86
75
1
2
6
4
8
3
MST-22
Diagram
MST-22
7531
8642blockingmechanism
Replacement of push-button
demounting tool
11
22demounting hole 33
��Installed push-button can be replaced by other one (see accessories).
Push-button demounting:
1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the push-
button jumps up a little.
2) Remove push-button from push-button switch.
Installation of a push-button:
3) Insert and press the push-button in the hole in the push-button switch.
For push-button, under which there is a spring, it is fi rst necessary to cut the
lug, and only after it insert it in the hole in the push-button switch and press it.
Minia
E42
Other devices
Control push-buttons
��They can be used in both building and industrial
installations and in security technology.
��For switching of electric circuits up to 25 A.
��Already installed push-button can be replaced.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
Colour Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of push-button of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
black 01 MTX-01-TB 37265 1 0.072 110 MTX-10-TB 37268 1 0.072 122 MTX-22-TB 37271 1 0.097 1
red 01 MTX-01-TC 37266 1 0.072 110 MTX-10-TC 37269 1 0.072 122 MTX-22-TC 37272 1 0.097 1
green 01 MTX-01-TE 37267 1 0.072 110 MTX-10-TE 37270 1 0.072 122 MTX-22-TE 37273 1 0.097 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Control push-buttons with signalling
��They can be used in both building and industrial
installations and in security technology.
��For switching of electric circuits up to 25 A.
��The installed push-button of black colour and indicator
lights of white colour 230 V a.c. can be replaced.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
11 MTX-11-TB-SG-A230 37274 1 0.107 120 MTX-20-TB-SG-A230 37275 1 0.107 1
1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
Double control push-buttons
��They can be used in both building and industrial
installations and in security technology.
��For switching two independent electric circuits up to 25 A.
��The installed push-button black colour can be replaced.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package
of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]
2x 11 MT2-11-TB 37264 1 0.0970 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts
CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS
Minia
E43
Other devices
Colour Type Product Weight Package
code [kg] [pcs]
red TC 8930 0.002 12green TE 8931 0.002 12black TB 8932 0.002 12white TG 8934 0.002 12
Accessories
Push-buttons
��They are intended for replacement of the already
installed push-buttons.
Indicator lights
��Indicator light power: 0.8 W
��Indicator light contains a LED.
��Indicator lights light permanently.
Colour Rated Type Product Weight Package
of cover voltage code [kg] [pcs]
red 230 V a.c. SC-A230 11102 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SC-X024 11106 0.003 12
green 230 V a.c. SE-A230 11103 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SE-X024 11107 0.003 12
yellow 230 V a.c. SD-A230 11104 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SD-X024 11108 0.003 12
white 230 V a.c. SG-A230 11101 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SG-X024 11105 0.003 12
Specifi cations
Type MTX-.. MTX-..-TB-SG-230 MT2-11-TB
Standards EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1
Approval marks
Contacts
Arrangement of contacts 1) 01, 10, 22 11, 20 2x 11
Rated operating voltage Ue
230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c.
Rated thermal current Ith
25 A 25 A 25 A
Rated operating current Ie
AC-12 25 A 25 A 25 A
AC-15 6 A 6 A 6 A
DC-12 1 A 1 A 1 A
Mechanical endurance 30 000 operating cycles 30 000 operating cycles 30 000 operating cycles
Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm
Push-buttons
Colour black, red, green, white 2) black, red, green, white 2) black, red, green, white 2)
Light signalling
Power output - 0.8 W -
Rated operating voltage Ue
- 24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c. -
Colour of cover - white, red, green, yellow 2) -
Light - permanent -
Source - LED -
Dispersion - by raster in front of LED -
Connection - 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 -
Torque - 0.8 Nm -
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C -25 ÷ +55 °C -25 ÷ +55 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) For control push-buttons it is possible to replace push-button and indicator lights additionally (see accessories)
CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS
Minia
E44
Other devices
CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS
Dimensions
17.5 17.524 24
44 44
62 627 7
5.5 5.5
89 8945 4565.5
65.586 86
7 75 5
1 1
2 2
6 6
4 4
8 8
3 3
MTX-.. MT2-..
Diagram
MTX-10-..
1
2
1
2(+)4 6
5
MTX-11-TB-SG-A230
1
2(+)4 6
5
MTX-20-TB-SG-A230 MT2-11-TB
1
2 6 4 8
5 3 71
2
MTX-01-..
2
1
4 6 8
3 5 7
MTX-22-..
Replacement of push-button and indicator light at MTX-..
demounting tool
11
22demounting hole
33
��Installed push-button or indicator light can be replaced by other one (see accessories).
Push-button or indicator light demounting:
1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the
push-button or indicator light jumps up a little.
2) Remove push-button or the indicator light from control push-button.
Installation of a push-button or indicator light:
3) Insert and press the push-button or the indicator light in the hole in the control push-button.
Push-button demounting:
1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the
push-button jumps up a little.
2 )Remove push-button from control push-button.
Installation of a push-button:
3) Insert and press the push-button in the hole in the control push-button.
demounting tool
11
22demounting hole
33
Replacement of push-buttons at MT2-..
��Installed push-button can be replaced by other one (see accessories).
Minia
E45
Other devices
Signal lights
��For signalling operating states, emergency lighting etc.
��They can be used in both building and industrial
installations and in security technology.
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
��Empty modules of signal lights enable arbitrary design.
Number of Colour of Rated Type Product Number Weight Package
indicator lights indicator light voltage code of modules [kg] [pcs]
1
red230 V a.c. MKA-SC-A230 37276 1 0.08 124 V a.c./d.c. MKA-SC-X024 37277 1 0.08 1
green230 V a.c. MKA-SE-A230 37278 1 0.08 124 V a.c./d.c. MKA-SE-X024 37279 1 0.08 1
white 230 V a.c. MKA-SG-A230 37280 1 0.08 12 red + green 230 V a.c. MKA-SC-SE-A230 37281 1 0.09 1
Colour Rated Type Product Weight Package
voltage code [kg] [pcs]
red 230 V a.c. SC-A230 11102 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SC-X024 11106 0.003 12
green 230 V a.c. SE-A230 11103 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SE-X024 11107 0.003 12
yellow 230 V a.c. SD-A230 11104 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SD-X024 11108 0.003 12
white 230 V a.c. SG-A230 11101 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SG-X024 11105 0.003 12
AccessoriesIndicator lights
��Indicator light power: 0.8 W.
��Indicator light contains a LED.
��Indicator lights light permanently.
Specifi cations
Type MKA-..
Standards EN 60947-5-1
Approval marks
Light signalling
Power output 0.8 W
Rated operating voltage Ue
24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c.
Colour of indicator light red, green, yellow, white
Light permanent
Source LED
Dispersion by raster in front of LED
Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2
Torque 0.8 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C
Working position arbitrary
SIGNAL LIGHTS
Empty modules of signal lights
Number of holes Type Product Number Weight Package
for indicator lights code of modules [kg] [pcs]
1 MKA-1 35558 1 0.07 1
2 MKA-2 35559 1 0.07 1
Minia
E46
Other devices
SIGNAL LIGHTS
Diagram
2 2(+) (+)4 4
MKA-SC-..MKA-SE-..MKA-SG-..
MKA-SC-SE-A230
3
(+)
1
Replacement of indicator lights
demounting tool
11
22
demounting hole 33
��Installed indicator lights can be replaced by other ones (see accessories).
Indicator light demounting:
1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole and push to ensure that
the indicator light jumps up a little.
2) Remove the indicator light from the signal light.
Installation of indicator light:
3) Insert and press the indicator light in the hole in the signal light.
Dimensions
17.5 24
44
62
5.5
89 45 65.5 86
1
2 4
3
MKA-..
connectors for indicator lights input
MKA-1 MKA-2
3(+)
(+)(+)
1
2 4 2 4
Minia
E47
Other devices
��For acoustic signalling of device status and the like.
��Mechanical design.
��Without sparking.
��Minimum service life 300 h.
��They are not intended for continuous operation
(continuous duty max. 1 hour).
��There are intended for installation in switchboards.
Rated operating Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U
ecode of modules [kg] [pcs]
8 ÷ 12 V a.c. UMZ-A012 35691 1 0.075 1230 V a.c. UMZ-A230 35692 1 0.075 1
Electric bells
Rated operating Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U
ecode of modules [kg] [pcs]
8 ÷ 12 V a.c. UMB-A012 35689 1 0.075 1230 V a.c. UMB-A230 35690 1 0.075 1
Electric buzzers
� Single-tone design.
Specifi cations
Type UMZ-.., UMB-..
Approval marks
Power supply
Rated operating voltage Ue
8 ÷ 12 V a.c., 230 V a.c.
Input power 4.6 VA
Rated frequency fn
40 ÷ 60 Hz
Connection
Cross-section 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm
Conductor L and N arbitrarily to terminals
Other data
Loudness from a distance 0.5 m 90 dB (UMZ-..), 80 dB (UMB-..)
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Degree of protection IP20
Ambient temperature -20 ÷ +55 °C
Working position arbitrary
Dimensions
88 8665.545
62
44
2417.5 4.5
UMZ-.., UMB-..
Diagram
UMZ UMB
ELECTRIC BELLS AND BUZZERS
Minia
E48
Other devices
Safety bell transformer
��For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the po-
wer input up to 4 VA with safe low voltage 6, 8, 12 V a.c.
��For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones,
auxiliary circuits of contactors, lighting, relays etc.
��The transformer is unconditionally short-circuit-proof
– withstands continuous short-circuit even without a
backup protection device, and continues to perform all its
functions as soon as the overload or short-circuit ceases.
��Degree of protection IP30.
Safety power supply
��For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the power
input up to 10 VA with safe low voltage 12, 24 V a.c./d.c.
��For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones, door
openers, transducers, auxiliary circuits of contactors,
lighting, relays etc.
��On the secondary side it is equipped with a PTC
thermistor (PTC), which limits the overcurrent in the
secondary winding at overload.
��Current limitation is signalled by two-colour LED, which
goes red.
��Presence of UPRI
is signalled by two-colour LED going
green.
��Protection of outputs by blocking capacitors against
interference.
��Equipped with voltage stabilizers.
Rated primary Rated secondary Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U
PRIvoltage U
SECcode of modules [kg] [pcs]
230 V a.c. 6, 8, 12 V a.c. UTZ-4-A 35688 3 0.475 1
Rated primary Rated secondary Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U
PRIvoltage U
SECcode of modules [kg] [pcs]
230 V a.c.12 V a.c. / d.c. UNZ-10T-X012 35685 3 0.36 124 V a.c. / d.c. UNZ-10T-X024 35686 3 0.36 1
Rated primary Rated secondary Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U
PRIvoltage U
SECcode of modules [kg] [pcs]
230 V a.c. 24 V a.c., 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c. UNZR-10T-X024 35687 3 0.36 1
Controlled safety power supply
��For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the
power input up to 10 VA with safe low voltage 24 V a.c.
and regulated voltage 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c.
��For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones, door
openers, transducers, auxiliary circuits of contactors,
lighting, relays etc.
��On the secondary side it is equipped with a PTC
thermistor (PTC), which limits the overcurrent in the
secondary winding at overload.
��Current limitation is signalled by two-colour LED, which
goes red.
��Presence of UPRI
is signalled by two-colour LED going
green.
��Protection of outputs by blocking capacitors against
interference.
��Equipped with voltage stabilizers.
POWER SUPPLIES
Minia
E49
Other devices
POWER SUPPLIES
Specifi cations
Type UTZ-4-A UNZ-10T-.. UNZR-10T-X024
Standards EN 60742 EN 60742 EN 60742
Approval marks
Power output 4 VA 10 VA 1) 10 VA 1)
Rated primary voltage UPRI
230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.
Rated secondary voltage AC 2) / current USEC
/ ISEC
6 V a.c. / 0.33 A 12 V a.c. / 0.8 A 24 V a.c. / 0.36 A
8 V a.c. / 0.33 A 24 V a.c. / 0.36 A
12 V a.c. / 0.33 A
Rated secondary voltage DC 2) / current USEC
/ ISEC
- 12 V d.c. / 0.4 A 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c. / 0.08 ÷ 0.3 A
24 V d.c. / 0.2 A
Rated frequency fn
50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
Protection class II II II
Light indication presence UPRI
- green LED green LED
Light indication current limitation - red LED red LED
Connection
Cross-section 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2
Torque 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm 0.5 Nm
Other data
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - typ TH 35 TH 35 TH 35
Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20
Ambient temperature -30 ÷ +35 °C -10 ÷ +35 °C -10 ÷ +35 °C
Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) At simultaneous loading of both AC and DC outputs the sum of both power inputs must not exceed 8 VA2) The transformers have a higher voltage at off -load connection. The shown voltages are those at rated load.
Dimensions
Diagram
UTZ-4-A UNZ-10T-.. UNZR-10T-X024
3
1 2230V
8V4
6V
12V6
UDC
SEC
UPRI
3
-
1 2
USEC
AC+
4 5 6 6
2
54
+
-
UDC
REG
3 1
UAC
SEC
UPRI
5
24
44
62 3
45 65.5 86
5.3
88
52.5 52.5 52.5
UTZ-4-A UNZ-10T-.. UNZR-10T-X024
Minia
E50
Other devices
POWER SUPPLIES
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600
UNZ-10T-X012 - 12 V a.c.
I [mA]sec
UNZ-10T-X024 - 24 V a.c.
UNZR-10T-X024 - 24 V a.c.
At ambient temperature +23 °C Load characteristic UNZ-10T-.., UNZR-10T-X024 - AC outlet
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400
I [mA]sec
U
[V]
sec
U
[
V]se
c
U
[V]
sec
Load characteristic UTZ-4-A
U = 8 V sec
U = 6 V sec
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
I [mA]sec
At ambient temperature +23 °CLoad characteristic UNZ-10T-.., UNZR-10T-X024 - DC outlet
UNZR-10T-X024 - 1,2-24 V d.c.
UNZ-10T-X024 - 24 V d.c.
UNZ-10T-X012 - 12 V d.c.
U = 12 Vsec
Characteristics
�� Imax
��Notice: at simultaneous loading of both AC and DC outputs the sum of both power inputs must not exceed 8 VA!
��At overload the red indicator light LIM on the front panel of the device goes on. Output current will drop to approx. 100 mA.
��It is necessary to disconnect the load at the output to renew the function.
Minia
E51
Other devices
��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide
35 mm according to EN 60715.
��ZSE-.. according to IEC 60884-1 – a connector of type E;
ensures contact by means of the connector with two
round plug contacts and central earthing pin. This
type is sometimes referred to as French one.
��ZSF-.. according to DIN 49440 - a connector of type F
(Schuko), sometimes referred to as German one. It
diff ers in the design of the earthing contact, which
consists of two contact metal strips placed on the
connector perimeter.
Dimensions Diagram
44
9045
4.5
60
41
ZSE-..
44
62.5
90
4.5 41
45
ZSF-..
ZSE-.., ZSF-..
Socket outlets
Type Use Connection Product Number Weight Package
code of modules [kg] [pcs]
ZSE-03 IEC 60884-1 bottom 37290 2.5 0.15 1
ZSE-06 IEC 60884-1 bottom and top 37291 2.5 0.15 1
ZSF-03 DIN (“SCHUKO”) bottom 37292 2.5 0.15 1
ZSF-06 DIN (“SCHUKO”) bottom and top 37293 2.5 0.15 1
Type ZSE-.., ZSF-..
Standards IEC 60884-1, DIN 49440
Approval marks
Rated operating voltage/current Ue/I
n230 V a.c./16 A
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C
Degree of protection IP20
Connection 1 ÷ 16 mm2, 2x (1 ÷ 4) mm2
Specifi cations
SOCKET OUTLETS
Minia
E52
Other devices
Interconnecting busbars
��For interconnection of 1 to 4-pole circuit breakers,
tumbler switches, residual current circuit breakers,
lightning current arresters and surge voltage arresters.
��For interconnection of a series of single-phase or three-
phase circuit breakers and tumbler switches, on
which an auxiliary switch is mounted.
��Busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.. with forks into the
head part of the terminal.
��Busbars S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. with pins into the
clamp part of the terminal.
��After shortening of busbars to particular length it is
necessary to remove the burrs of copper in order to
prevent short-circuit etc. Where possible use end covers
EKC to cover the ends of interconnecting busbars.
INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS
Busbar Number Spacing of Number Cross-section Type Product End Weight Package
shape of poles outlets [mm] of outlets [mm2] code cap [kg] [pcs]
fork
1 17.8
210 G1L-30-10 37352 - 1) 0.008 5016 G1L-30-16 37356 - 1) 0.012 50
3 16 G1L-50-16-L 39789 EKC-1 0.019 50
4 16 G1L-65-16-L 39790 EKC-1 0.024 50
610 G1L-106-10 37353 - 1) 0.023 5016 G1L-106-16 37357 - 1) 0.037 50
1210 G1L-210-10 37354 - 1) 0.045 5016 G1L-210-16 37358 - 1) 0.073 50
57
12 G1L-1000-12 37355 EKC-1 0.227 50
16 G1L-1000-16-L 39788 EKC-1 0.312 50
20 G1L-1000-20 37359 - 0.367 50
27 2) 37 24 G1L-27-1000-24 37360 - 0.307 50
2 17.8 28 x 216 G2L-1000-16 37361 EKC-2+3 0.477 2016 G2L-1000-16-DC 39080 EKC-2+3 0.467 20
317.8
2 x 310 G3L-106-10 37362 - 1) 0.046 2516 G3L-106-16 37366 - 1) 0.074 25
3 x 310 G3L-160-10 37363 - 1) 0.069 2516 G3L-160-16 37367 - 1) 0.111 25
4 x 310 G3L-210-10 37364 - 1) 0.091 2516 G3L-210-16 37368 - 1) 0.147 25
19 x 310 G3L-1000-10C 37365 EKC-3 0.457 2016 G3L-1000-16C 37369 EKC-2+3 0.737 20
2 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 16 x 3 16 G3L+9-1000-16 37370 EKC-2+3 0.614 20
3+N 17.8 27 x 2 16 G3L+N-1000-16 37372 EKC-4 0.983 15
4 17.8 14 x 4 16 G4L-1000-16 37371 EKC-4 0.983 15
pin
1
17.8
1210 S1L-210-10 38475 - 1) 0.045 5016 S1L-210-16 37374 - 1) 0.047 50
5710 S1L-1000-10 37373 EKC-1 0.204 5016 S1L-1000-16 37375 EKC-1 0.302 50
2737 16 S1L-27-1000-16 37376 EKC-1 0.201 50
37 25 S1L-27-1000-25 37377 - 0.315 30
2 17.86 x 2
10 S2L-210-10 38476 - 1) 0.067 2016 S2L-210-16 38477 - 1) 0.11 20
28 x 2 16 S2L-1000-16 37378 EKC-2+3 0.477 20
2+N 1 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 22 x 2 16 S2L+N+9-1000-16 39849 EKC-2+3 0.71 20
3
17.8
2 x 310 S3L-106-10 38478 - 1) 0.055 2516 S3L-106-16 38479 - 1) 0.08 25
3 x 310 S3L-160-10 38480 - 1) 0.085 2516 S3L-160-16 38481 - 1) 0.115 25
4 x 310 S3L-210-10 38482 - 1) 0.11 2516 S3L-210-16 38483 - 1) 0.15 25
19 x 310 S3L-1000-10 38484 EKC-3 0.505 2016 S3L-1000-16 37379 EKC-2+3 0.737 20
2x 17.8 + 1x 26.8 16 x 3 16 S3L+9-1000-16 38485 - 0.72 20
27 12 x 316 S3L-27-1000-16 37380 EKC-2+3 0.537 2025 S3L-27-1000-25 37381 EKC-3-36 0.995 10
3+N 17.8 27 x 2 16 S3L+N-1000-16 38487 EKC-4 1.205 15
1 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 22 x 2 16 S3L+N+9-1000-16 39616 EKC-4 0.983 15
417.8 14 x 4 16 S4L-1000-16 38486 EKC-4 1.205 15
27 9 x 4 25 S4L-27-1000-25 37382 EKC-3-36 1.327 51) The busbar is manufactured as enclosed one2) For single-pole devices with auxiliary switch
Minia
E53
Other devices
Accessories
��For covering the ends of connecting busbars.
Type Product Description Weight Package
code [kg] [pcs]
EKC-1 37383 for 1-pole rails cross-section 10, 12, 16 mm2 0.0005 10EKC-2+3 37384 for 2-pole rails and for 3-pole rails cross-section 16 mm2 0.001 10EKC-3 37385 for 3-pole rails cross-section 10 mm2 0.001 10EKC-3-36 37386 for 3-pole rails and for 4-pole rails cross-section 25 mm2 0.002 10EKC-4 37387 for 4-pole rails cross-section 16 mm2 0.002 10
Type Product Weight Package
code [kg] [pcs]
ES-35-GS 37388 0.035 10
Power supply unit
��It enables power supply of interconnecting busbars
by conductors of cross section up to 35 mm2.
��The blocks can be assembled in series to create a multi-
pole connection unit.
��Degree of protection IP20.
End caps
Specifi cations
Type G1L-.., S1L-..,G2L-1000-16-DC G2L-..,G3L-..,G4L-..,S2L-..,S3L-..,S4L-..
Rated operating voltage Ue
690 V a.c. / 1000 V d.c. 415 V a.c.
Loading current 63 ÷ 180 A 63 ÷ 180 A
Cross-section 10 ÷ 25 mm2 10 ÷ 25 mm2
Short-circuit strength with backup fuse 250 A gG 50 kA 50 kA
Overvoltage category III III
Rated impulse withstand voltage 8 kV 8 kV
Degree of protection IP20 IP20
Busbar material E-Cu-F25 E-Cu-F25
Insulation material PC/ABS-Blend PC/ABS-Blend
Rail cross-section
10 mm2 12 mm2 16 mm2 20 mm2 24 mm2 25 mm2
Power supply from the rail edge 63 A 65 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 100 APower supply from the rail centre 1) 100 A 110 A 130 A 150 A 170 A 180 A1) Max. loading current in one direction must not be higher than max. loading current at power supply from the rail edge
Max. loading current per phase
Diagram
G3L+N-.., S3L+N-..
L2 L3L1 N N N
G4L-.., S4L-..
L3L1 L2 N
G3L-.., S3L-..
L1 L2 L3
G2L-.., S2L-..
L2(N)
L1
G1L-.., S1L-..
L1
S2L+N-..
L2L1 N N
INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS
Minia
E54
Other devices
INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS
Dimensions
972
37 x 1
6
627 12 2
155
14
G1L-27-1000-24979
28 x 2
6
617.8 11
17
29
1.5
15
G2L-1000-16
G1L-1000-12996.8
17.857x 1
6
126 1.5
16
5 14
996.8
57 x 1
6
17.8 126
15
6
2
15
G1L-1000-20
996.8
17.8
6
19 x 3 6 11
30
17
15
1.5
G3L-1000-16C
G3L-106-16, G3L-160-16, G3L-210-16
17.8
6
6 11
15
17
1.5
30
106 (G3L-106-16)
160 (G3L-160-16)
210 (G3L-210-16)
996.8
17.8
6
19 x 3 6 11
15
26
13.5
1
G3L-1000-10C
G3L-106-10, G3L-160-10, G3L-210-10
17.8
6
6 11
15
13
1
26
106 (G3L-106-10)
160 (G3L-160-10)
210 (G3L-210-10)
979
14 x 4
6
11617.8 1.5
20.5
30
17
G3L+N-1000-16, G4L-1000-16G3L+9-1000-16
16 x 3
971.6
17.8 26.8 11 6
6
30
17
15
1.5
ES-35-GS17.7 26
33
19.2
979
28 x 2
6
617.8 11
17
29
1.5
15
G2L-1000-16-DC
G1L-50-16-L
35.6
17.8
6
6 1.5
14
5
19
G1L-65-16-L
53.4
17.8
6
126 1.5
14
5
19
11
30 (G1L-30-10)
106 (G1L-106-10)
210 (G1L-210-10)
6
17.8 6
28
14
1
4
G1L-30-10, G1L-106-10, G1L-210-10
6
30 (G1L-30-16)
106 (G1L-106-16)
210 (G1L-210-16)
G1L-30-16, G1L-106-16, G1L-210-16
11
6
17.8 6
16
4
1.5
29.5
6
G1L-1000-16-L
996.8
17.8
6
126 1.5
14
5
19
57 x 1
Minia
E55
Other devices
INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS
Dimensions
29
17
15
1.5
S2L+N+9-1000-16
23 x 2
970.1
17.8 26.8 4
S1L-1000-10
57 x 1
996.8
17.8 4 1
14
5 14
S1L-1000-16
57 x 1
996.8
17.8 4
145
1.5
15
1.5
15
5 15
S1L-27-1000-16
27
972
437 x 1
20
5
218
S1L-27-1000-25
37 x 127
972
6.517
29
1.5
15
S2L-1000-16
28 x 217.8
979
4
28.5
16
1(1.5)
4
S1L-210-10, (S1L-210-16)
216
417.8
S2L-210-10, S2L-210-16
15
17
1.5
28.5
210
417.8
S3L-106-10, S3L-106-10, S3L210-10
15
14
1
25
106 (S3L-106-10)
160 (S3L-160-10)
212 (S3L-210-10)
417.8
S3L-1000-16
19 x 317.8
996.8
4
29
17
15
1.5
29
17
15
1.5
S3L-27-1000-16938
26.812 x 3
4
43
18.3
27
2
S3L-27-1000-25945
273x 12
6.5
29
17
15
1.5
S3L+9-1000-16
3x 16
970.1
17.8 26.8 4
S3L-106-16, S3L-106-16, S3L210-16
17
16
1.5
27
106 (S3L-106-16)
160 (S3L-160-16)
212 (S3L-210-16)
417.8
S3L-1000-10
19 x 317.8
996.8
425
12
15
1
S4L-27-1000-25
4x 927
945
6
42
24.6
2
27
1.5
20.5
30
17
S3L+N-1000-16979
417.84x 14
S3L+N+9-1000-16
1.5
20.5
30
17
22 x 2 17.8 26.8 4
Minia
E56
Other devices
INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS
Examples of use of interconnecting busbars
1-pole interconnecting busbars
For interconnection of 1-pole devices in the head part
of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, SJB, SVL, SVM, APN.
1-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm
For interconnection of 1-pole devices with auxiliary switch
in the head part of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, APN.
2-pole interconnecting busbars
For interconnection of 2-pole devices in the head part
of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, APN, OFE, OFI.
3-pole interconnecting busbars
For interconnection of 3-pole devices in the head part
of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, SJB, SVL, SVM, APN.
3-pole interconnecting busbars with a gap on the
auxiliary switch
For interconnection of 3-pole devices with auxiliary switch
in the head part of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, APN.
4-pole interconnecting busbars
For interconnection of 4-pole devices in the head part
of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, OFI, OFE, APN.
1-pole interconnecting busbars
For interconnection of 1-pole devices in clamp part
of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, SJB, SVL, SVM, APN.
1-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm
For interconnection of 1-pole circuit breakers LST in clamp
part of the terminal or for interconnection of 1-pole devices
with auxiliary switch in clamp part of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, LST, APN, AST.
2-pole interconnecting busbars
For interconnection of 2-pole devices in clamp part
of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, APN.
3-pole interconnecting busbars
For interconnection of 3-pole devices in clamp part
of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, APN.
3-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm
For interconnection of 3-pole circuit breakers LST in clamp
part of the terminal or for interconnection of 1-pole devices
with auxiliary switch in clamp part of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, LST, APN, AST.
4-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm
For interconnection of 4-pole circuit breakers LST in clamp
part of the terminal.
Use: LST, AST.
INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS WITH FORKS
, ,
INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS WIHT PINS
Minia
E57
Other devices
Terminal extension up to 25 mm2 with fork
��For connection of another conductor to the head part
of the terminal of a circuit breaker, residual current
circuit breaker, tumbler power switch etc.
��For example, the best solution is to connect a conductor
for power supply of an electric meter in the clamp
part of the circuit breaker terminal, and another
conductor through the connecting adapter AS-25-G
in the head part of the circuit breaker terminal.
��Conductor cross-section: 6 ÷ 25 mm2.
Terminal extension 3x10 mm2
��For connection of 3 conductors/device pole of cross
section 10 mm2.
Type Product Accessories Weight Packagecode to [kg] [pcs]
AS-25-G 37390 LPE, LPN, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN 0.013 30
Terminal extension up to 25 mm2 with pin
��For connection of conductors to the clamp part of the
terminal.
��Conductor cross-section: 6 ÷ 25 mm2.
Type Product Accessories Weight Packagecode to [kg] [pcs]
AS-25-S 37389 OFI-..-2-...., OFE-..-2-...., RLP 0.014 30
Terminal extension up to 50 mm2
��For connection of Al or Cu conductors. ��Cross-section of Cu conductors: 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2.
��Cross-section of Al conductors: 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2.
Type Product Accessories Weight Packagecode to [kg] [pcs]
AS-50-S-AL01 38749 LPE, LPN, LST, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN, AST 0.018 1
Terminal extensions up to 95 mm2
��For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section
35 ÷ 95 mm2.
��With direct or outbowed terminal.
Type Product Accessories Weight Package
code to [kg] [pcs]
CS-FH000-3NP95 13740straight terminal – the package contains the set of 3 pieces
LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST 0.176 1
CS-FH000-1NP95 14378 straight terminal LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST 0.06 1
CS-FH000-3NV95 13742outbowed terminal – the package contains the set of 3 pieces
LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST 0.184 1
Type Product Accessories Weight Packagecode to [kg] [pcs]
N3x10-FH000 14127 LST, OLE, OLI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVM, AST 0.035 1
TERMINAL EXTENSIONS
Minia
E58
Other devices
TERMINAL EXTENSIONS
Dimensions
611.5
2.5
15 17
20.5
15 17
20.5
2.54
24.5
13
17 23.5 8
7 7
24.5 17.5
27
7 6
23 32.5
38
23 32.5
38
4 410 10
AS-25-S N3x10-FH000AS-25-G
CS-FH000-...NP95 CS-FH000-3NV95
AS-50-AL01
AS-25-G
For connection of another conductor of cross section
up to 25 mm2 to the head part of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN.
AS-25-S
For connection of conductors of cross section
up to 25 mm2 to the clamp part of the terminal.
Use: OFI-..-2-.., OFE-..-2-.., RLP.
AS-50-S-AL01
For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section
up to 50 mm2 to the clamp part of the terminal.
Use: LPE, LPN, LST, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC,
SVM, APN, AST.
Examples of use of connecting adapters and blocks
CS-FH000-3NP95, CS-FH000-1NP95, CS-FH000-3NV95
For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section
up to 95 mm2 to the clamp part of the terminal.
Use: LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST.
N3x10-FH000
For connection of three conductors of cross section 10 mm2
to the clamp part of one terminal.
Use: LST, OLE, OLI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVM, AST.
Minia
E59
Other devices
Terminal board
��For branching lr connection of PEN, PE, N and L conductors.
��They are used in switchboards, which are not delivered
with terminal blocks.
��Mounting on 35 mm „U“ rail according to EN 60715.
��Colour: green, blue, grey.
Dimensions
CS-L7
13
53
266
CS-L15
13
107
266
CS-L12
13
88
266
23
6
104
51.5
5.5
4.525
23.5
CS-N15, CS-PE15
51.5
5.5
4.525
23.523
CS-N7, CS-PE7
23
6
8551.5
5.5 23.5
4.525
CS-N12, CS-PE12
Type CS-PE, CS-N, CS-L
Standards EN 60947-1
Approval marks
Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35
Connection 1 ÷ 16 mm2
Specifi cations
Colour Number Type Product Weight Packageof terminals code [kg] [pcs]
7 x 16 mm2 CS-N7 35901 0.026 10blue 12 x 16 mm2 CS-N12 35902 0.030 10
15 x 16 mm2 CS-N15 35903 0.048 10
7 x 16 mm2 CS-PE7 35904 0.026 10green 12 x 16 mm2 CS-PE12 35905 0.030 10
15 x 16 mm2 CS-PE15 35906 0.048 10
7 x 16 mm2 CS-L7 1) 35898 0.026 10grey 12 x 16 mm2 CS-L12 1) 35899 0.030 10
15 x 16 mm2 CS-L15 1) 35900 0.048 101) covered design
TERMINAL BOARD
Minia
E60
Other devices
NOTES
Minia
F1
Modular devices
GLOSSARYNote: Precise defi nitions and texts relating to the specifi ed terms, are contained in relevant standards see Name.
Name Symbol Interpretation
Rated operating voltage
EN 60898-1; 5.2.1.1
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1
Ue
The value of voltage stated by the manufacturer. Relevant tests or utilization categories relate to it.
Together with rated (operating) current, it determines the use of the device. Maximum value of rated
operating voltage must never be higher than the value of rated insulation voltage.
Max. operating voltage Umax
Maximum value of operating voltage, at which device function is not endangered.
Min. operating voltage Umin
Minimum value of voltage conditioning correct function (of circuit breakers, switches etc.) or test
of correct function (residual current circuit breakers).
Rated current
EN 60898-1; 5.2.2
IEC 755; 4.2.5
EN 61008-1; 5.2.2
EN 61009-1; 5.2.2
In
The value of current assigned to a circuit breaker or residual current circuit breaker by the manufacturer,
which the device can conduct continuously. For circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers
with overcurrent release also at a reference temperature.
Rated operating current
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3
Ie
Rated operating current of the device is stated by the manufacturer with regard to rated operating
voltage, rated frequency, rated duty, utilization category and enclosure type, if applicable.
Utilization category
EN 60947-1; 4.4; Supplement A
AC-xx
DC-xx
Utilization category of a device defi nes its assumed use. It is characterized by one or several operating
conditions: current expressed as multiple of Ie, voltage expressed as multiple of U
e, power factor or time
constant, short-circuit behaviour, selectivity, other operating conditions depending on circumstances.
Rated thermal current without cover
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.1
Ith
Maximum value of current, which can be transferred by open device in eight-hour operation without
exceeding its permissible temperature rise.
Rated thermal current with cover
EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.2
Ithe
Maximum value of current, which can be transferred by a device in specifi ed enclosure in eight-hour
operation without exceeding its permissible temperature rise.
Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking
capacity
EN 60898-1; 3.5.5.1
Icu
The value of short-circuit current expressed as root-mean-square value of alternating component
of prospective short-circuit current in place of utilization of the circuit breaker, which it must be able to
switch off repeatedly. After the test the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct 0.85 multiple of its
non-switching current for an agreed time.
Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity
EN 60898-1; 3.5.5.2
Ics
The value of short-circuit current expressed as root-mean-square value of alternating component
of prospective short-circuit current in place of utilization of the circuit breaker, which it must be able to
switch off repeatedly under test conditions (EN 60 898-1; 9.12.11.4.2 and 9.12.12.1). After the test the
circuit breaker shall be able to conduct 0.85 multiple of its non-switching current for an agreed time.
Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
EN 60898-1; 5.2.4
Icn
The value of rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity stated for this circuit breaker by the
manufacturer in accordance with test conditions (EN 60 898-1; 9.12.11.4.2 and 9.12.12.1)
The following must apply: Icn
≥ Ik“
Energy limitation class
EN 60898-1; Supplement ZA
It determines maximum value of I2t [A2s] released by the circuit breaker depending on its In, I
cn and type
of tripping characteristic. It makes it possible to state selectivity with a backup fuse (I2t released by the
circuit breakers must be less than blowing current I2t of the fuse) and short-circuit protection of the
cable (I2t released by the circuit breaker must be less or equal to S2k2 of the cable). On the basis of classes
of energy limitation it is not possible to state unambiguously selectivity of two circuit breakers in series.
Rated frequency
EN 60898-1; 5.2.3
EN 60947-1; 4.3.3
IEC 755; 4.2.5
fn
Network frequency the device is designed for and the other characteristic values correspond to.
Minia
F2
Modular devices
GLOSSARY
Name Symbol Interpretation
Rated conditional short-circuit current
EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.4
IEC 755; 4.3.2
Inc
The value of prospective short-circuit current stated by the manufacturer, which can be reliably
transferred by a short-circuit protection device stated by the manufacturer for the time of operation
of this device.
The following must apply: Inc
≥ Ik“
Initial peak short-circuit current
EN 60909-0; 1.3.5
Ik
“ The value of short-circuit current at the moment of its origin in given point of wiring expressed as root-
mean-square value of alternating symmetric component of prospective short-circuit current.
Prospective current
EN 60898-1; 3.5.2
Ip
Current, which would have passed through the circuit, if every pole of the circuit breaker be replaced
by a conductor of a negligible impedance.
Rated residual operating current
IEC 755; 4.2.2
EN 61008-1; 5.2.3
EN 61009-1; 5.2.3
IΔn
Root-mean-square value of residual operating current stated for the residual current circuit breaker
by the manufacturer, at which the residual current circuit breaker must operate under stated conditions.
Rated impulse withstand voltage
EN 60664-1; 1.3.8.1; 1.3.9.2
EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.3
EN 60898-1; 5.2.1.3
EN 61008-1; 5.2.1.Z1
Uimp
Peak value of voltage impulse of a prescribed shape and polarity, which the device is able to withstand
without failure under stated conditions and to which the values of aerial distances relate. Uimp
of the
device must be equal to or higher than the value stated for transient overvoltage in the point of the
circuit (overvoltage category) the device is used in.
Overvoltage category
EN 60664-1; 2.2.2.1
EN 60947-1; 2.5.60
EN 60898-1; 3.6.5
EN 61008-1; 3.Z1.5
EN 61009-1; 3.Z1.5
Numerically defi ned level of transient overvoltage i.e. overvoltage originating from atmospheric or
switching overvoltage. Standard EN 60664-1 states for electric equipment overvoltage categories:
Overvoltage category IV: beginning of installation, outside lead
Overvoltage category III: fi xed wiring
Overvoltage category II: appliances
Overvoltage category I: light-current appliance
Maximum constant operating voltage
EN 61643-11; 3.11
Uc
Maximum root-mean-square value of alternating or direct current voltage, which can be permanently
applied to the arrester terminals. It must be equal to or higher than rated network voltage.
Voltage protection level
EN 61643-11; 3.15
Up
Maximum instantaneous value of voltage on the arrester, determined by appropriate tests. It
characterizes arrester action in voltage limitation on its terminals.
Rated discharge current
EN 61643-11; 3.8
In
Peak value of current with impulse shape 8/20 μs, for which the arrester is rated. It can pass through it
repeatedly. (It relates to T2.)
Maximum discharge current
EN 61643-11; 3.10
Imax
Peak value of current with impulse shape 8/20 μs, at which the surge voltage arrester still is not
damaged. This current can pass through the arrester twice, while the disconnecting device can only
react at the second impulse. (It relates to T2.)
Lightning current
EN 61643-11; 3.9
Iimp
It is defi ned by three parameters – peak current Ipeak, charge Q and specifi c energy W/R. Lightning
current arresters must be able to release impulse current at least twice without their damage. (It relates
to T1.)
Quenching follow-current
EN 61643-11; 3.41
Ifi
Short-circuit current, the arrester itself is able to interrupt. (It relates to T1.)
Rated loading current
EN 61643-11; 3.14
IL
Maximum permanent rated root-mean-square or direct current, which can fl ow in a load connected
to protected output terminals of the surge voltage arrester. (It relates tok T3.)
MiniaModular devices
NOTES
Minia Modular devices
NOTES
www.oez.com
OEZ s.r.o.Šedivská 339561 51 LetohradCzech Republictel.: +420 465 672 111 +420 465 672 101fax: +420 465 672 398 +420 465 672 151e-mail: [email protected]
Minia
Min
ia
Modular devices
Mod
ular
dev
ices
Any changes reserved
N1-2011-A
www.oez.com